Palm 200000 PDA With 802.11b WLAN User Manual

Palm Inc PDA With 802.11b WLAN

Contents

User Manual

Handbook forPalm™ Tungsten™ CHandheldsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Copyright© 2002 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. The Palm logo, HotSync, MultiMail, PalmModem, and Palm OS are registered trademarks, and the HotSync logo, Palm, Palm Powered, Tungsten, and VersaMail are trademarks of Palm, Inc. Palm, Inc. uses the Bluetooth trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. All other brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.Disclaimer and Limitation of LiabilityPalm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this handbook.Palm assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement. Software Download AvailablePalm™ Desktop software is supplied on a CD-ROM disc. If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive for your computer, you can download the Palm Desktop software from www.palm.com/support/.PN: 407-4891A-US DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
iiiAbout This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Chapter 1: Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Minimum requirements: Windows computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Minimum requirements: Mac computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Chapter 2: Exploring Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Locating handheld components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Locating front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Locating back panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Adding an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Adjusting the screen brightness level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Chapter 3: Navigating and Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Using the navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Typing capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Accessing international and special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Using the Function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Using ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Using elements of the handheld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Using Graffiti writing to enter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Graffiti tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Graffiti alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Graffiti numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Punctuation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Symbol characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Accented characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Additional non-English characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Navigation strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28ContentsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsivGraffiti ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Beaming data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Using your computer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Importing data from a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Importing data from a Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Chapter 4: Working with Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Other ways to open applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Opening expansion card applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Switching between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Categorizing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Changing the Applications Launcher display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Copying applications to or from an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Selecting copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Using menu commands and the command toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Using menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Using the command toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Choosing application preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Performing common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Creating records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Editing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Purging records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Categorizing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Sorting lists of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Attaching notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Choosing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Receiving alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Hiding or masking private records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Installing and removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Installing files and add-on applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Installing applications and files on a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Palm Quick Install Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Installing applications and files on a Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsvRemoving applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Removing Palm Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Chapter 5: Using Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Creating an Address Book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Selecting types of phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Changing Address Entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Address Book menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Chapter 6: Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Performing calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Viewing recent calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Using Calculator menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Chapter 7: Using Card Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Reviewing Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Renaming a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Formatting a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Managing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Using the Card Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Chapter 8: Using Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Scheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Selecting an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Rescheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Setting an alarm for an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Scheduling repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Changing repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Considerations for repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Changing the Date Book view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Working in Week view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Working in Month view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Working in Agenda view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Spotting event conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Date Book menus, preferences, and display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsviChapter 9: Using Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Adding expense items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Changing the date of an Expense item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Entering receipt details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Customizing the Currency pick list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Changing the default currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Defining a custom currency symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Setting Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Working with Expense data on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Displaying the euro on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Printing the euro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Using Expense menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Chapter 10: Using Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Creating memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Reviewing memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Using Memo Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Chapter 11: Using Note Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Creating a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Reviewing notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Changing Note Pad color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Setting an alarm for a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Using Note Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Chapter 12: Using PalmTM Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Viewing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Viewing photos in Thumbnail view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Viewing photos in List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Viewing a slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Rotating photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Viewing photo information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Organizing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Sorting photos in List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsviiCreating an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Filing photos in albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Copying and Moving photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Renaming or deleting an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Beaming photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Sending photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Deleting photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Working with photos on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Using Palm Photos menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Photo menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Chapter 13: Using To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Creating list items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Setting priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Checking off a To Do List item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Changing To Do List item details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Setting a due date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Setting To Do Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Using To Do List menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Chapter 14: Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software . . . . . 141What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Getting started with the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Synchronizing an existing username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Setting up and managing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Account and connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Setting up a network e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Creating a network e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Creating a synchronize-only account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Setting VersaMail connection preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Editing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Deleting an e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Getting, sending, and managing e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Getting and reading e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsviiiCreating and editing mail folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Creating and sending new e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Working with URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Working with attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Deleting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Emptying the trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Marking messages as read or unread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message . . 220Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop . . . . . . . . . . . 221Configuring an account in HotSync Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Setting synchronization options and account settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Converting attached files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Synchronizing an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Using SSL with the conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Going beyond the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Managing mail filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Managing mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Adding APOP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Adding ESMTP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applica-tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Using the command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251E-mail header details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Backing up mail databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Wireless IMAP folder synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Accessing corporate e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Viewing the wireless coverage indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Troubleshooting account access problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Five-way navigation in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Chapter 15: Using Palm™ Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Using Palm Web Browser’s features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Palm Web Browser is easy to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Palm Web Browser is fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Palm Web Browser is secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264What Palm Web Browser looks like . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsixGetting help in Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Opening Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Browsing the Web on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Visiting a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Following a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Returning to a web page you just visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Returning to your home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Downloading a file to your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Stopping the download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Refreshing a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Viewing information about a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Bookmarking Your Favorite Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Adding a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Visiting a bookmarked page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Editing information about a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Deleting a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Saving Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Saving a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Opening a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Editing information about a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Copying text from a page to another application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Deleting a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Finding Web Pages You Recently Visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Returning to a page you visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Clearing the History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Customizing Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Changing the default size of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Changing your home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Changing how images are downloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Enabling or disabling autofill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Enabling or disabling cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Changing the size of the History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Controlling how Palm Web Browser accesses the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Viewing web content with plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Finding the Palm Web Browser version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Palm Web Browser menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsxChapter 16: Using World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Setting the primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Choosing a different primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Setting the secondary locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Adding a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Modifying a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Removing a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Setting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Using World Clock menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Chapter 17: Performing HotSync® Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Selecting HotSync setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Customizing HotSync application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Conducting network HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Connecting to your computer through a wireless local area network (LAN) 298Performing a wireless network HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer . . . 301Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Conducting IR HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Preparing your computer for infrared communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Performing an IR HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Creating a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . 312Chapter 18: Setting Preferences for Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Viewing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Buttons preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Connection preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317IR to PC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Date and Time preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Digitizer preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Formats preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Country default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Time, date, week start, and numbers formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Sounds and Alerts preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321System, alarm, and game sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsxiAlarm Vibrate and indicator light settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Keyboard Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Remapping keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Network preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Modem Accessory and TCP/IP software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Selecting a service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Entering a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Selecting a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Adding telephone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Entering a prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Disabling call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Using a calling card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Connecting to your service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Creating additional service templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Adding detailed information to a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Selecting Next Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Defining primary and secondary DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Login scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Creating a login script on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Plug-in applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Deleting a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Network preferences menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336On-Screen Writing preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Enabling Palm On-screen Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Displaying penstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Owner preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Power preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Auto-off delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Cradle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Beam Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Security preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Assigning a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Locking your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Recovering from a forgotten password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Making records private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Setting security options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352ShortCuts preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ContentsxiiVPN preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Connecting to your VPN account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Wi-Fi preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Turning the 802.11b radio on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Finding Wi-Fi connection information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Conserving battery power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Adding and editing a Wi-Fi connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Appendix A: Maintaining Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Caring for your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Battery considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Resetting your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Performing a soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Performing a hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Appendix B: Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Software installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Operating problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Tapping and writing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377HotSync problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Beaming problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Recharging problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Security and VPN problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Wi-Fi problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Product Regulatory and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
1About This BookThis handbook is designed to help you get up and running quickly on your Tungsten C handheld. It describes all you need to know about how to use your handheld and the applications that come with it. It describes:■Enabling wireless features■Locating all the parts of your handheld■Viewing and entering data■Working with expansion cards■Using your handheld with your computer■Personalizing your handheld with your own preference settingsAfter you become familiar with the basic functionality of your handheld, you can use the rest of this handbook as a reference for performing less common tasks, for maintaining your handheld, and for solving problems that might arise as you operate your handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
About This Book2DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
3CHAPTER 1WelcomeYour new Palm™ Tungsten™ C handheld is wirelessly enabled so that you can use it to transmit and receive information over the airwaves. Use your handheld to do the following:■Connect to your corporate or personal local area network (LAN) wirelessly with a built-in 802.11b radio enabling you to read, compose, and send e-mail on-the-go.■Browse or search the Internet through your wireless LAN.■Stay organized and on time by keeping your appointments, contact information, and to-do items in one place.■Wirelessly connect in coffee shops and airports that have LAN service. A service subscription agreement is required to access these services.Before you can use all these features, you must set up your handheld and install software on your desktop computer.Your handheld comes with an easy-to-follow installation guide, Palm™ Montana™ Read This First, that steps you through the process of successfully setting up your handheld. The guide contains important information that must be followed for initial setup of the features available on your handheld.IMPORTANT If you are upgrading from another Palm OS® handheld, see www.palm.com/support/ for important upgrade instructions before beginning your Tungsten C handheld installation.System requirementsBefore you install and operate Palm™ Desktop software, your computer system must meet the following minimum requirements.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 1 Welcome4Minimum requirements: Windows computersThe minimum requirements for Windows computers are as follows:■IBM-compatible Pentium-class computer■One of the following operating systems:– Windows NT 4.0 Workstation with SP6 or later (requires a serial cradle/cable, sold separately, and administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)–Windows 98–Windows ME– Windows 2000 Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software) – Windows XP Home or Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)■Internet Explorer 4.01 with SP2 or later■Netscape Navigator ■50 megabytes (MB) available hard disk space■VGA monitor or better (16 Bit or High Color, and 800 x 600 resolution recommended)■CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software from www.palm.com/support/)■Mouse■One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately)Minimum requirements: Mac computersThe minimum requirements for Mac computers are as follows:■Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor■Mac OS– Mac OS 9, version 9.1 or later – Mac OS X, version 10.1.2 or later■25MB available hard disk space■12MB available RAM■Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 x 600 or better■CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software from www.palm.com/support/)■MouseDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Finding information5■One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately and compatible with Mac OS 9 only)Finding informationFor installation information, see the Palm™ Montana™ Read This First that came with your Tungsten C handheld. For comprehensive information about using your handheld, continue reading this electronic handbook. For support information, upgrade information, articles, and answers to questions, see www.palm.com/support/.For more information about using Palm Desktop software, see the following: ■The handheld tutorial, Quick Tour. To access this tutorial, tap the Quick Tour icon from the Applications main screen.■The electronic Palm Desktop software for the Macintosh User’s Guide. To access this guide, open the Palm folder and then open the Documentation folder. Double-click the file Palm Desktop.pdf. ■The online help for Palm Desktop software. To access the online help, open Palm Desktop software and select the Help menu.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 1 Welcome6DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
7CHAPTER 2Exploring Your HandheldYourPalm™ Tungsten™ C handheld uses a wireless local area network (LAN) to help you stay in touch with important information while you are away from your desk. You can stay organized, on time, and up-to-date with daily tasks. Use your new handheld to do the following:■Compose and securely send and receive business or personal e-mail through your wireless LAN.NOTE Some companies restrict access to internal e-mail accounts when using a handheld. Check your company or network administrator for their policy on use of handhelds.■Receive alerts when a new e-mail arrives or a reminder occurs. Rely on any or all of the three alert modes: the indicator light, vibrator, or alarm sound.■Set preferences for how you receive alarms: hearing a sound, seeing a blinking indicator light, or feeling your handheld vibrate. Choose any combination.■Browse or search the Internet.■Enter your schedule in Date Book.■Keep all your contact names, addresses, and phone numbers in Address Book.■Prioritize and assign your tasks a due date in To Do List.■Set alarms from World Clock and Date Book to keep yourself on schedule and remind yourself of appointments, redial reminders, and notes.■Synchronize your data with Palm™ Desktop software on your Windows or Mac computer so you can work with your personal information on your computer and maintain a copy of your information.■Insert SD, MultiMediaCard, or SDIO expansion cards to add more software or memory, or to back up your data.■Beam information to another device that has an infrared (IR) port. Locating handheld componentsTake a few moments to locate the front and back panel components of your handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld8Locating front panel controlsIR port Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data from other Palm OS® handhelds, and to perform HotSync® operations. See “Using elements of the handheld interface” in Chapter 3 and see “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for more information.Keypad The area where you type letters and numbers, and access special function keys. See Chapter 3 to learn how to type characters. Power button Turns your handheld on or off. If your handheld is turned off, pressing the power button turns the handheld on and returns you to the last screen you viewed. If your handheld is turned on, pressing the power button turns the unit off. ScreenKeyboard areaNavigatorPower button/Brightness controlGreen indicator lightStylusIR portDateBookAddress Book WirelessE-mailApplication buttonsSelect button Application buttonsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Locating handheld components9Application buttons Activate the individual handheld applications that correspond to the icons on the buttons: Date Book, Address Book, E-mail, and Wireless. See “Buttons preferences” in Chapter 18 for details on reassigning these buttons to open any application on your handheld.Navigator The five-way navigation button enables you to move up, down, right, and left in pick lists and menus. You can scroll down to view information below the viewing area, and scroll up to view the information above the viewing area. The navigator also has some special functions that are described in this handbook.Select button The navigator center Select button enables you to select items. The Select button also has some special functions that are described in this handbook.Screen Displays the applications and information stored in your handheld. It is touch-sensitive and responds to the stylus.Green indicator light A blinking green light indicates:■an e-mail message has arrived. ■an alarm or event notification has occurred.A dialog box appears, describing the reason for notification. Acknowledging the notification turns off the indicator light. The light also indicates that the handheld is properly placed in the cradle.Stylus Slides in and out of the slot in the side channel of the handheld. To use the stylus, remove it from the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil. Unscrew the top of the stylus to access the reset tool.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld10Locating back panel componentsUniversal connector Connects your handheld to the cradle, which in turn connects to the back of your computer and through the AC adapter to the wall current. This allows you to recharge your handheld as well as update the information between your handheld and computer using HotSync technology. The universal connector also connects peripheral hardware devices to your handheld.Reset button Under normal use, you should not have to use the reset button. See “Resetting your handheld” in Appendix A for information about when and how to use the reset button.Expansion card slot Accepts SD, MultiMediaCard, and SDIO expansion cards, enabling you to add more memory, applications, or other functionality. You can also back up data to an expansion card.NOTE Expansion cards are purchased separately.Headset jack Connects a hands-free headset to your handheld, enabling you to record and listen to voice memos, and listen to audio files from the Internet.Speaker For improved system sounds and the playing of audio files, such as voice recording (.wav) or multimedia.Side channel The left side channel holds the front cover, which slides in and out.UniversalconnectorExpansion card slotSide channel for coverReset buttonHeadset jackSpeakerDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding an expansion card11Adding an expansion cardA tiny expansion card (sold separately) increases the variety of tasks you can do and the amount of space you have for storing software and data on your handheld.To insert a card:1. Insert the card in the direction shown by the icon.2. Push the card in with your thumb. You feel the card lock and hear the system sound.To remove a card:1. Push lightly against the card with your thumb.2. When the card is released, you hear the system sound.For complete information about working with expansion cards, see Chapter 7.Label on card faced downNotched cornerPushPushDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld12Adjusting the screen brightness levelThe screen brightness makes it easy for you to see the information on your handheld. The screen brightness level can be adjusted to for ease of viewing and to extend battery life. You can adjust the brightness level using the Adjust Brightness dialog box.To adjust the screen brightness level:1. Press Function + Brightness .2. Tap to the left or right of the slider to adjust the brightness in small increments, or drag the slider to change the brightness in large increments.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
13CHAPTER 3Navigating and Entering DataThis chapter explains how to enter data into your handheld, navigate around the interface, and use menu commands. There are several ways to enter data, to navigate, and to use menu commands:■Tapping■Using the five-way navigator■Using the handheld keyboard■Using GraffitiTM writing■Beaming data from another device that has an infrared port ■Entering or importing data in Palm™ Desktop software and then synchronizing with your handheldTapping Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen, using the stylus to tap elements on your handheld screen is the basic action that gets things done on your handheld.The first time you start your handheld, setup instructions appear on the screen. These instructions include a calibration screen. Calibration aligns the internal circuitry of your handheld with its touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen, the handheld can detect exactly which task you want to perform. IMPORTANT Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the handheld screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or other sharp object to write on the handheld screen.With your handheld turned on, you can tap the handheld screen to do many operations, such as the following:■Open applications■Choose menu commands■Select options in dialog boxesDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data14Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your computer, you can also drag the stylus to select text. You can also use the stylus to drag the slider of any scroll bar.Using the navigatorWhen you work with most applications, the navigator on the front panel of your handheld makes it easy for you to navigate among and select your entries. You can use the navigator to perform tasks without the stylus using one hand.See Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 for additional information about using the navigator with Address Book, and Chapter 8 for additional information on using the navigator with Date Book. To navigate in list screens, do any of the following:■Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll an entire screen of records. ■Press and hold Up or Down on the navigator to accelerate the scrolling.■Press Select on the navigator to insert the selection highlight. When the selection highlight is present, you can do the following:– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next records.– Press Select again to view the selected record.– Press Left on the navigator to remove the selection highlight.To navigate in record screens:1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current record.2. Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next record. (This feature is not available in Address Book.)3. Press Select on the navigator to return to the list screen.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using the keyboard15To navigate in dialog boxes:■While a pick list is open, press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight an item, and then press Select on the navigator to select the item.■Press Select on the navigator to close a dialog. If there’s only one button, pressing Select activates that button. If there’s multiple buttons, Select activates affirming buttons such as OK, Yes, or Done.IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully. Sometimes, selecting OK or Yes results in deleting data.Using the keyboardYou can quickly and accurately enter text or numbers on your handheld using the keyboard. The keyboard also has special function keys that enable you to access features. Another feature is AutoCorrect, which automatically corrects some common misspellings when entering data from the keyboard.Below the keyboard are application buttons and the 5-way navigator that enables you to navigate menus and pick lists quickly without using the stylus. These features are described in Chapter 2. Letter and number keys: Enables you to enter letters and numbers. You can change the key response from the Keyboard preferences screen. See “Keyboard Preferences” in Chapter 18.You can also access international characters using the navigator control. See “Accessing international and special characters” later in this chapter. Tab/Brightness key: Adds a tab or opens the Brightness dialog box. For more information on the Brightness dialog box, see “Adjusting the screen brightness level” in Chapter 2.Return/Enter keyFunction keyDelete keyHome/ShortCut keyTab/Brightness keyLetter and number keysCAPS/Find key Space/Symbol keyCommand/Menu keyDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data16Typing capital lettersThe keyboard enables you to capitalize letters in two ways:■Use the CAPS key . Press the CAPS key twice to initiate CAPS lock.■Press and hold the key. This feature works only when the Keyboard preference Repeat Function is set to Capital. See “Keyboard Preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.Accessing international and special charactersYou can access international and special characters directly from the keyboard or from onscreen keyboards. These character sets enable you to communicate accurately through your memos or wireless messages.Accessing from the keyboardYou can access international characters from the keyboard by pressing and holding a key, and then pressing Up and Down on the navigator. The character on the screen scrolls through a sequence of related international characters. You can scroll though the sequence either forward or backward depending on whether you are pressing Up or Down on the navigator. Function key: Press to access the secondary character set. See “Using the Function key” later in this chapter.CAPS/Find key: Capitalizes letters or opens the Find dialog box. For more information on capitalizing letters, see the next section “Typing capital letters”. For information on the Find dialog box, see “Finding information” in Chapter 4.Space/Symbol key: Adds a space to the text or opens the onscreen keyboards. For more information about the onscreen keyboards, see “Accessing the onscreen keyboards” later in this chapter.Command/Menu key: Opens the Command toolbar or Menu. The Command bar has many functions, such as showing the signal strength for the 802.11b radio. For information about the Command mode, see “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 4. For more information about Menus, see “Using menus” in Chapter 4.Home/ShortCut key: Opens the Application Launcher or enables you to enter a text ShortCut. For more information on ShortCuts, see “Using ShortCuts” later in this chapter.Return/Enter key: Adds a manual return to the next line or enters the data.Delete/Backspace key: Deletes the previous character.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using the keyboard17NOTE This feature does not work with every key or with the Function key secondary character set.To access international characters from the keyboard:1. Press and hold a key.2. Press Up or Down on the navigator.3. Accessing the onscreen keyboardsYou can open the onscreen keyboards anytime you need to enter special characters or numbers on your handheld. To use the onscreen keyboard:1. Open any application (such as Memo Pad). 2. Tap any record, or tap New.3. Press Function + Symbol .When a keyboard is open, you can tap to open any of the other keyboards.After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in the record.BackspaceCarriage returnTabCaps lockCaps shiftTap here to display alphabetic keyboard Tap here to display numeric keyboard Tap here to display international keyboard AlphaNumeric SymbolTap here to display symbol keyboard InternationalDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data18Using the Function keyThe Function key enables you to access the secondary character or feature set from each of the keys. The secondary character and feature set is labeled in blue in the upper right on each available key.When you press Function , a dot appears in the lower-right corner, indicating that the next key pressed will use the secondary character or feature set. If you press the Function twice, the dot changes to a “1” and the function feature remains locked. Pressing Function again unlocks it.Using special featuresIn addition to characters, the Function key accesses special features on some of the keys. The following keys have special features: Brightness key: Opens the Brightness dialog box. See “Adjusting the screen brightness level” in Chapter 2 for more information. Find key: Opens the Find dialog box. See “Using Find” in Chapter 4 for more information. Menu key: Opens the menu for the current screen. For more information, see “Using menus” in Chapter 4 and see “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 4.Function keyFunction active icon Function lock iconDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using elements of the handheld interface19Using ShortCutsShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy. ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word processors. The handheld comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts preferences” in Chapter 18 to learn about creating your own ShortCuts.To use a ShortCut:1. Press Function + ShortCut . When you press the ShortCut key, the ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.2. Type the ShortCut characters. Using elements of the handheld interfaceMenu bar and menu commands A set of commands that are specific to the application. Not all applications have a menu bar.To access the menu bar, do one of the following:■Tap the Menu bar.■Press Function + Menu .To access the menu commands, do one of the following:■Tap the menu command on the menu.■Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.■Press Command Stroke + the letter. For more information see “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 4.Scroll bar Previous/next arrowsCheck boxCommand buttonPick listMenu barMenu commandDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data20Check box When a checkmark appears in a check box, the corresponding option is active.To insert or remove a check mark:■If a check box is empty, tapping it inserts a checkmark. ■If a check box is selected, tapping it removes the checkmark.Command buttons These appear in dialog boxes and at the bottom of application screens. To select a command button, do one of the following:■Tap a button to perform a command.■Press Select on the navigator to select buttons such as OK, Yes, or Done.■Press Function + Enter to select the OK, Done, or Yes buttons.■Press Function + Backspace , to select Cancel or No buttons.Next/previous arrows The left and right arrows display the previous and next record; the up and down arrows display the previous and next page of information. To use the arrows, do one of the following:■Tap the arrows.■Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.Pick list A list of choices that you can select from.To use the pick list:■Tap the arrow to display a list of choices.■Tap an item in the list.■Use Up or Down on the navigator to scroll through the list and select an item.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data21Displaying online tipsMany of the dialog boxes that appear on your handheld contain an online Tips icon in the upper-right corner. Online tips anticipate questions you have in a dialog box, provide shortcuts for using the dialog box, or give you other useful information.To display an online tip:1. Tap the Tips icon . 2. After you review the tip, tap Done.Using Graffiti writing to enter dataIMPORTANT Palm™ On-screen Writing must be enabled before you can use Graffiti writing. See “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.In this section you learn the procedures for creating letters, numbers, punctuation, and symbols, as well as some Graffiti tips and tricks.Most people find they can enter text quickly and accurately with only minutes of practice. Graffiti writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard. The Graffiti characters closely resemble the uppercase letters of the regular alphabet, which makes Graffiti writing easy to learn. Scroll bar A bar that enables you to scroll up and down a page.To use the scroll bars:■Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll the display one line at a time. ■To scroll to the previous page, tap the scroll bar just above the slider. To scroll to the next page, tap the scroll bar just below the slider.■You can also scroll to the previous and next pages by pressing Up and Down on the navigator.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data22There are four basic concepts for success with Graffiti writing:■If you draw the character shape exactly as shown in the tables later in this chapter (like the shapes shown in the following diagram), you can achieve close to 100 percent accuracy.■The heavy dot on each shape shows where to begin the stroke. Certain characters have similar shapes but different beginning and end points. Always begin the stroke at the heavy dot. (You should not create the heavy dot; it is there only to show you where to begin the stroke.)■Most characters require only a single stroke. When you lift the stylus from the screen, your handheld recognizes and displays the text character immediately. Some single Graffiti strokes are portions of the regular alphabet equivalents.■The screen is divided into two parts: the left side for writing the letters of the alphabet and the right side for writing numbers. To write Graffiti characters:1. Tap and hold the place where you want your text to appear. You must see a blinking cursor before you write the text.2. Use the tables on the following pages to find the stroke shape for the letter you want to create. For example, the stroke shown below creates the letter n.Write letters on the left sideWrite numbers on the right sideDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data23Two stroke shapes are available for some letters. Choose the one that’s easiest for you.As you’ll see later in this chapter, you use the same shape to create both the uppercase and lowercase version of a letter.3. Position the stylus in the left side of the screen. 4. Start your stroke at the heavy dot, and draw the stroke shape as it appears in the tables.5. Lift the stylus from the screen at the end of the stroke shape.When you lift the stylus from the screen, your handheld recognizes your stroke immediately and prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen.As soon as you lift the stylus from the screen, you can begin the stroke for the next character you want to write.NOTE You must begin the character strokes on the left side of the screen. Otherwise your handheld does not recognize them as text characters.To delete Graffiti characters:■Set the insertion point to the right of the character you want to delete and make the backspace stroke (a line from right to left).Graffiti tips When using Graffiti writing, keep these tips in mind:■Accuracy improves when you write large characters. Draw strokes that nearly fill the side of the screen.■Write at natural speed. Writing too slowly can generate recognition errors.■Do not write on a slant. Vertical strokes should be parallel to the sides of the screen.■Press firmly.Start stroke at heavy dotLift stylus hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data24Graffiti alphabetThe Graffiti alphabet consists of the following letters:Letter Strokes Letter StrokesANB O CP D QER F SG THUIV JWKX LY M ZSpace BackspaceCarriagereturn Period Tap twiceor ororororororororororDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data25Capital lettersYou make capital letters with the same stroke shapes as the basic alphabet characters. You must first “shift” to caps—just as you press the Shift key on a keyboard—and then write the character strokes.Graffiti writing includes a feature that automatically capitalizes the first letter when you create a new sentence or a new record (by tapping New or a blank line). To draw the first letter of a word as a capital letter:■Enter the Caps Shift stroke:TIP When Caps Shift is active, an up arrow symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the handheld screen. If you accidentally activate Caps Shift, backspace will cancel it.To enter only capital letters (Caps Lock):■Enter the Caps Lock stroke:TIP When Caps Lock is active, an underlined up arrow symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the handheld screen. To return to lowercase, make the Caps Shift stroke.Graffiti numbersWriting numbers with Graffiti writing is similar to writing letters of the alphabet, except that you make the character strokes on the right side (numbers side) of the Graffiti writing area.CapsShift CapsLock Caps ShiftCaps LockNumber Strokes Number Strokes0 5 or orDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data26Punctuation marksGraffiti writing can create any punctuation symbol that you can enter from a standard keyboard. When Enable Writing is enabled, the punctuation shift area at the bottom of the screen is highlighted by a color. A single tap within the punctuation shift area activates Punctuation mode and the next stroke you make with the stylus creates a punctuation mark.TIP Double-tapping within the punctuation shift area creates a period. When Punctuation Shift is active, you can make a symbol stroke anywhere in the Graffiti writing area (the letters or numbers side).1 627 38 4 9orSymbol Stroke Symbol StrokePeriod. Dash—Comma,Left Paren(Apostrophe'Right Paren)Question?Slash/ Exclamation!Dollar$Punctuation shift areaDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data27You can also use the following additional Graffiti punctuation marks.Symbol charactersAll symbol characters begin with the symbol shift stroke in the Graffiti writing area of your handheld.When the Symbol Shift is active, a slanted shift symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. The next stroke that you make creates the symbol or extended character.Accented charactersTo create accented characters, draw the stroke that is normally used to create the letter, followed by an accent stroke. Graffiti writing then adds the accent to the letter.For example, the following diagram shows the strokes required to draw an accented e.@ # % ^ & * < > + = | —\ { } [ ] ~ ` ; : " tabSymbolShift Symbol Shift•    ,,,,,°,+—X:==cY?!ƒ∅= eDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data28You can use the following accent strokes in combination with Graffiti letters:Using these accent strokes, you can write the following accented letters:àáâãäåèéêëìíîïòóôõöùúûüÿýñAdditional non-English charactersYou can write the following characters without any special punctuation or shifting:You must write these non-English characters in the left side of the Graffiti writing area.Navigation strokesIn addition to character symbols, Graffiti writing includes special strokes that you can use to navigate within text or fields in your applications.Graffiti ShortCutsGraffiti ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy. ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word processors. a a a a a acaeCommand StrokeMove cursor rightMove cursor leftPrevious field(Address Book only)Next Field(Address Book only)Open Address Record(Address Book only)DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming data29Graffiti writing comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts preferences” in Chapter 18 to learn about creating your own ShortCuts.To use a ShortCut, draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters. The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.Your handheld includes the predefined Graffiti ShortCuts shown in the following table.Beaming dataYour handheld is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that is located at the top of the handheld, behind the small dark shield. The IR port supports the IrCOMM implementation of the standards for infrared communication established by the Infrared Data Association (IrDA). This means that not only can you beam data to another Palm OS® handheld that’s close by and equipped with an IR port, but you can also beam data to a mobile phone and to any other device that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards and that can read the type of data you’re beaming.You can beam the following information between devices with an IR port:■The record currently displayed in Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Note Pad, Palm Photos, or Memo Pad■All records of the category currently displayed in Address Book, To Do List, Note Pad, Palm Photos, or Memo PadShortCut Entry ShortcutDate Stamp dsTime stamp tsDate / time stamp dsMeeting meBreakfast brLunch luDinner diDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data30■A special Address Book record that you designate as your business card, containing information you want to exchange with business contacts■An application installed in RAM memory■An application installed on an expansion card that is seated in the card slotTIP You can also perform HotSync® operations using the IR port. See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.To select a business card:1. Create an Address Book record that contains the information you want on your business card.2. Press Function + Menu .3. Select “Select Business Card” on the Record menu.4. Tap Yes.To beam a record, business card, or category of records:1. Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam.2. Press Function + Menu .3. Select one of the following from the Record menu:– The Beam command for an individual record– In Address Book only: Beam Business Card–Beam Category4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving handheld.For best results, handhelds should be between 10 centimeters (approximately 4 inches) and 1 meter (approximately 39 inches) apart, and the path between the two handhelds must be clear of obstacles. The beaming distance to other Palm OS handhelds may be different.5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue working on your handheld.TIP You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly beam your business card to another device with an IR port.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming data31To beam an application:1. Press the Home .2. Press Function + Menu .3. Tap App, and then select Beam.4. Select either Handheld or Card from the Beam From pick list.5. Tap the application you want to transfer.Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed. These are listed with a lock icon next to them.6. Tap Beam.7. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving handheld.8. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue working on your handheld.To receive beamed information:1. Turn on your handheld.2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting handheld to open the Beam dialog box.3. Select a category for the incoming information, create a new category, or leave the information unfiled.4. Tap Yes. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data32Using your computer keyboardIf you have a lot of data to enter, or prefer to use the computer keyboard, you can use Palm Desktop software or any supported personal information manager (PIM) to enter information. You can then perform a HotSync operation to synchronize the information on your computer with the information on your handheld. Many of the applications that came with your handheld are also available in Palm Desktop software and in most PIMs, so you don’t need to learn different applications. For more information on entering data on your computer, refer to the online Help in Palm Desktop software, the Quick Tour in Palm Desktop software (for Windows users), and the Palm™ Desktop software Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide on the Palm Desktop software CD-ROM.Importing dataIf you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets and databases, or if you want to import data from another handheld, you can transfer the data to your handheld without having to enter it manually. Save the data in one of the file formats in the following list, import it into Palm Desktop software, and then perform a HotSync operation to transfer the data to your handheld.Importing data from a Windows computerPalm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats: ■Comma delimited (.csv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only■Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only■CSV (Lotus Organizer 2.x/97 Mapping): Address Book only■vCal (.vcs): Date Book only ■vCard (.vcf): Address Book only■Date Book archive (.dba)■Address Book archive (.aba)■To Do List archive (.tda)■Memo Pad archive (.mpa)Archive formats can be used only with Palm Desktop software. Use the archive file formats to share information with other people who use a Palm OS handheld or to create a copy of your important Palm Desktop information.To import data from a Windows computer:1. Open Palm Desktop software.2. Click the application into which you want to import data.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Importing data333. If you are importing records that contain a field with category names, do the following:Select All in the Category box.Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also exist in the application. If the categories do not exist, create them now; otherwise, the records are imported into the Unfiled category.4. From the File menu, choose Import.5. Select the file you want to import.6. Click Open.If you are importing a vCal or vCard file, skip to step 10. You do not have to specify which fields correspond to the imported data.7. To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields, drag fields in the left column so that they are opposite the corresponding imported fields on the right.8. If you do not want to import a field, deselect the check box for that field.9. Click OK.The imported data is highlighted in the application.10. To add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting data.Using File LinkThe File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad information to your handheld from a separate external file on your Windows computer, such as a company phone list. You can configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category in Palm Desktop software and on your handheld. With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following formats:■Comma-separated (*.csv)■Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)■Address Book archive (*.aba)■Text (*.txt)For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data34Importing data from a Mac computerPalm Desktop software can import data from any of the following applications when you export the data in the appropriate file format: ■Address Book Plus (text file)■Claris Organizer (Palm Desktop software can open these files directly).■ClarisWorks (Save under new name as ASCII text file).■DateBook Pro (text file)■DayMaker (text file)■Dynodex (text file)■FileMaker Pro (tab separated text file)■Meeting Maker (text file)■Newton running OS 1.0 with Newton Connection Kit:Names, Date Book Calendar, and Notepad (text file)■Now Contact (text file)■Now Up-to-Date (text file)■QuickDex (text file)■TouchBase Pro (text file)Palm Desktop software can also import data in the following file formats:■Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt)■vCal (.vcs): Data Book only■vCard (.vcf): Address Book onlyTo import data from a Mac computer:1. Open Palm Desktop software.2. From the File menu, choose Import.3. Select the file you want to import.4. Click Import.5. If you want to change the order of the fields you’re importing, point to a field, wait for the cursor to change to a double arrow, and then drag the field to a new location.6. If you do not want to import a field, click the arrow between the field names.7. From the Fields pop-up menu, choose the appropriate field.8. From the Delimiters pop-up menu, choose the appropriate delimiter.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Importing data359. Click OK.10. To add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting data.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data36DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
37CHAPTER 4Working with ApplicationsThis chapter explains how to open and switch between applications on your handheld, how to change application settings so they are personalized to your work methods, and how to categorize applications so you view them in related groups.Opening applicationsYou can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on your handheld or on an expansion card. You can also open Date Book, Address Book, VersaMailTM, and Palm™ Web Browser with the application buttons on your handheld.In addition to providing a way for you to open applications, the Applications Launcher displays the current time, battery level, and application category. To open an application on your handheld:1. Press Home . Home key opens Application LauncherAddress BookDate BookE-mailWirelessNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications382. Tap the icon of the application that you want to open. If you have many applications installed on your handheld, tap the scroll bar to see all your applications. Other ways to open applicationsYou can also open applications on your handheld in either of the following ways:■Press and hold Select on the navigator to open the Applications Launcher. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight. Press Up, Down, Right, and Left on the navigator to highlight the icon of the application you want to open. Press Select on the navigator to open the application. ■In the Applications Launcher, type the first letter of the application’s name. The Applications Launcher scrolls to the first application with a name that begins with that letter and highlights the icon. You can open the icon by pressing the Enter key.Opening expansion card applicationsWhen an expansion card is properly seated in the expansion card slot, your handheld responds based on the contents of the card and the application that is active when you insert the card. In some cases, the application on the card opens automatically upon insertion, or if you insert a card containing data from the current application, the application displays the data on the card. In other cases, the Applications Launcher switches to the card, and displays its contents, and the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen displays the name of the card.To open an application on an expansion card:■Select the icon of the application that you want to open.Switching between applicationsWhen working with any application, press Home or press an application button on your handheld to switch to another application. Your handheld automatically saves your work in the current application and displays it when you return to that application. Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Categorizing applications39When you use an expansion card, your handheld creates and displays a new category that matches the name of the expansion card. You can easily switch between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card.To switch to an expansion card:1. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner.TIP When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, you can also press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category pick list.2. Select the category item that matches the name of the expansion card.Categorizing applicationsThe category feature enables you to manage the number of application icons that appear onscreen in the Applications Launcher. You can assign an application to a category and then display a single category or all your applications. By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Games, Main, and System. You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories. When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the last item in the category pick list becomes the name of the expansion card. You cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.To categorize an application: 1. Press Home . 2. Press Command Stroke + Y.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Category on the App menu.Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications403. Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category.TIP To create a new category, select Edit Categories from the pick list. Tap New, enter the category name, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK to add the category. 4. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.To display applications by category: 1. Press Home . 2. Do one of the following:– Press Home repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.– Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and select the category you want to display.– When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category list, press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight a category, and then press Select on the navigator to display that category.Changing the Applications Launcher displayBy default, the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you can choose to show a list of applications. You can also choose to view the same category of applications each time you open the Applications Launcher.To change the Applications Launcher display:1. Press Home .2. Press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Preferences.3. Tap the View By pick list and select List.Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Copying applications to or from an expansion card414. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category:1. Press Home .2. Press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Preferences.3. Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Copying applications to or from an expansion cardYou can copy applications from your handheld to an expansion card, or from an expansion card to your handheld.To copy an application to an expansion card:1. Press Home .2. Press Command Stroke + C.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.3. Select Handheld from the Copy From pick list.4. Select the card name from the Copy To pick list.The Copy To pick list appears only if there are multiple cards available.5. Tap an application to copy.6. Tap Copy.Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications427. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.You can install applications to a card that is seated in the expansion card slot during a HotSync® operation; see “Installing files and add-on applications” later in this chapter for details. NOTE If you view your applications on the card using a Card Reader on your Windows or Mac computer, the actual file names may differ from those displayed in the Applications Launcher.To copy an application from an expansion card:1. Press Home .2. Press Command Stroke + C.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.3. Select the card name from the Copy From pick list.4. Select Handheld from the Copy To pick list.5. Tap an application to copy.6. Tap Copy.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.You can also beam applications from expansion cards to your handheld. See “Using elements of the handheld interface” in Chapter 3 for details.Selecting copy settingsWhen using the copy feature, you can set the following:■How applications are sorted and listed■Whether to copy only the application or both the application and its data files To select copy settings:1. Press Home .2. Press Command Stroke + C.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using menus433. Tap Settings.4. Select Name or Size from the Sort By pick list.5. Tap the Copy Application Only check box to select it, if you want to copy only the application files. Leave it deselected if you want to copy both the application file and its associated data files.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.NOTE The Sort By setting is in effect each time you use the copy feature. Each time you want to copy an application only, you must select the Copy Applications Only check box.Using menusMenus on your handheld are easy to use. Once you have mastered them in one application, you can use them the same way in all other applications.The menus of each application are illustrated in the chapter that discusses that application.To open the menu bar:1. Open an application (such as Memo Pad).2. Do one of the following:– Press Function + Menu . DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications44– Tap the inverted title area at the top of the screen.In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit, and Options. The Record menu is selected and contains the commands New Memo, Delete Memo, and Beam Memo.Choosing a menuThe menus and menu commands that are available depend on the application that is currently open. Also, the menus and menu commands vary depending on which part of the application you’re currently using. For example, in Memo Pad the menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo record screen.To select a menu command with the stylus:1. Tap the menu bar for an application.2. Tap the menu that contains the command you want to use.3. Tap the command you want to use.TIP After you open the menu bar, you can also press Right and Left on the navigator to select a menu, press Down on the navigator to select the command you want to use, and then press Select on the navigator to run the command.Menu commandsMost menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. For information on using menu commands “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in the next section.Press Function Tap the title areaPress MenuDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using menu commands and the command toolbar45Using menu commands and the command toolbarBy using the menu commands you can access many functions directly from the keyboard without tapping. You can also view the 802.11b radio signal strength and access the Wi-Fi preferences screen.Using menu commandsMost menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. The command letters appear to the right of the command names. For example, to choose Select All in the Edit menu, press Command stroke , and type the letter s.Using the command toolbarThe command toolbar displays the Wi-Fi icon and the 802.11b radio signal strength indicator. The command toolbar also displays context-sensitive menu commands for the current screen. For example, if text is selected the menu icons displayed may be Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste. Tap an icon to select the command.To use menu commands:1. Press Command stroke .The Command toolbar opens at the bottom of the screen. The Command toolbar indicates that you are in Command mode.2. Tap an icon or type the command letter immediately to choose the menu command. Command mode is active only for a short time.Command lettersMenu commandsMenu commandsCutUndo Copy Paste Beam DeleteNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications46To access Wi-Fi status:1. Press Command stroke .2. Tap the Wi-Fi icon .From the Wi-Fi Status dialog box, you can view the network connection and signal strength. You can also tap to access Wi-Fi and VPN preferences. See “Wi-Fi preferences” in Chapter 18 and see “VPN preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information on preferences.Choosing application preferencesYou can set options that affect an entire application in the application’s Preferences dialog box.To change preferences for an application: 1. Open an application.2. Press Command Stroke + R.– Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the Options menu.NOTE Not all applications have a Preferences command.3. Make changes to the settings.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen WritingThe Edit menu also has an option Enable Writing and Disable Writing that enables or disables Palm On-screen Writing. Enabling Palm On-screen Writing allows you to use the full screen to write GraffitiTM characters. For a description of Graffiti characters and Palm On-screen Writing, see “Using Graffiti writing to enter data” in Chapter 3.TIP On-screen writing can be turned on and off from the preferences screen. For more information, see “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks47To turn on or off Palm On-screen Writing writing:■From the Edit menu, tap Enable Writing or Disable Writing.Performing common tasksThe tasks described in this section use the term records to refer to an individual item in any of the applications: a single Date Book event, Address Book entry, To Do List item, Memo Pad memo, Note Pad note, or Expense item.Creating recordsYou can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, Note Pad, and Expense.To create a record:1. Select the application in which you want to create a record.2. Tap New.3. In Date Book only: Select start and end times for your appointment, and press Function + Enter , or tap OK.4. Enter text for the record.5. (Optional) Tap Details to select attributes for the record. (In Note Pad the Details command is located on the Options menu.)6. In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad only: Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.There’s no need to save the record because your handheld saves it automatically.Editing recordsAfter you create a record, you can change, delete, or enter new text at any time. Two screen features tell you when your handheld is in editing mode:■A blinking cursor Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications48■One or more dotted edit linesNOTE In Note Pad you can write anywhere on the screen. Therefore, you will not see an edit line or blinking cursor unless the cursor is in the title line. Entering textFor information on how to enter text using the keyboard on your handheld or the keyboard attached to your computer, see Chapter 3. For information on entering text in Note Pad, see Chapter 11.Using the Edit menuThe Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. In general, commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select in an application.To select text in an application:1. Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select.2. Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it (in yellow). NOTE You can also double-tap to select a word, or triple-tap to select a line of text. You can also drag across the text to select additional words, or drag down to select a group of lines.The following commands may appear in an Edit menu:Undo Reverses the action of the last edit command. For example, if you used Cut to remove text, Undo restores the text you removed. Undo also reverses deletions you made using the backspace. Cut Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of your handheld. You can paste the text you cut into another area of the current application or into a different application. Copy Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of your handheld. You can paste the copied text into another area of the current application or into a different application.Edit line Blinking cursorDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks49Deleting recordsTo delete a record using the menu command:1. Select the record you want to delete.2. Press Command Stroke + D.To delete a record using the Menu:1. Select the record you want to delete.2. Press Function + Menu . 3. Select Record, and then select one of the following Delete commands:Date Book: Delete EventAddress Book: Delete AddressTo Do List: Delete ItemNote Pad: Delete NoteMemo Pad: Delete MemoExpense: Delete ItemA confirmation dialog box appears. If you want to save a copy of the deleted item to an archive file in Palm™ Desktop software, be sure that the check box is selected. If you don’t want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it. 4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.If you choose to save a copy of the selected item, your handheld transfers it to the archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation. (The archive option is not available in Note Pad.)Other ways to delete recordsYou can also delete records in the following ways:■Delete the text of the record.■In Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, and Memo Pad, open the Details dialog box for the record, tap Delete, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Paste Inserts the cut or copied text at the selected point in a record. The text you paste replaces any selected text. If you did not previously cut or copy text, Paste does nothing.Select All Selects all the text in the current record or screen. This enables you to cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere.Keyboard Opens the onscreen keyboard. After you finish with the onscreen keyboard, press Function + Enter , or tap Done.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications50NOTE When deleting a repeating event in Date Book, you can choose to delete the current repeating event, current and future events, or all instances of that event.■In Note Pad, open the note you want to delete, and then tap Delete.Purging recordsOver time, as you use Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you’ll accumulate records that have outlived their usefulness. For example, events that occurred months ago remain in the Date Book, and To Do List items that you marked as completed remain in the list, as do Expense items.All these outdated records take up memory on your handheld, so it’s a good idea to remove them by using Purge. If you think Date Book or To Do List records might prove useful later, you can purge them from your handheld and save them in an archive file on your computer.Purging is not available in Address Book, Note Pad, or Memo Pad; you must delete outdated records manually from these applications.To purge records:1. Open the application.2. Press Command Stroke + E.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Purge on the Record menu. A confirmation dialog box appears. Date Book: Tap the pick list and select how old a record must be to be purged. Purge deletes repeating events if the last of the series ends before the date that you purge records.Date Book, To Do List: If you want to save a copy of the purged records to an archive file on your desktop, be sure that the check box is selected. If you don’t want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it.Expense: Select the category you want to purge. All data in the selected category will be purged and there is no archive option.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK or Done.If you chose to save a copy of the purged records, your handheld transfers them to an archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation.NOTE Purging does not happen automatically. You must select the command to make it happen.Categorizing recordsYou can categorize records in the Address Book, To Do List, Note Pad, Memo Pad, and Expense applications so that they are grouped logically and are easy to review. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks51When you create a record, your handheld automatically places it in the category that is currently displayed. If the category is All, your handheld assigns it to the Unfiled category. You can leave an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any time.By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Business and Personal. You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories in each application. When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the last item in the category pick list is the name of the expansion card. You cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.Address Book contains the QuickList user-defined category, in which you can store the names, addresses, and phone numbers you might need in emergencies (doctor, fire department, lawyer, and so on).Expense contains two user-defined categories, New York and Paris, to show how you might sort your expenses according to different business trips.The illustrations in this section come from Address Book, but you can use these procedures in all the applications in which categories are available. To move a record into a category:1. Select the record you want to categorize.2. In Address Book only: Tap Edit.3. Tap Details.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications524. Tap the Category pick list to display the list of available categories.5. Select the category for the record.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.NOTE In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad you can select the category name in the upper-right corner of the screen to assign the item to a different category.To display a category of records:1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the list screen.NOTE In the Date Book Agenda view, the pick list is in the upper right of the To Do list. 2. Select the category you want to view.The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category.TIP Pressing an application button on your handheld scrolls through all the categories of that application except for Unfiled. This feature is not available in Date Book.Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks53To define a new category:1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.2. Select Edit Categories. 3. Tap New.4. Enter the name of the new category, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.You can assign any of your records to the new category.To rename a category:1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.2. Select Edit Categories. Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications543. Select the category that you want to rename, and then tap Rename.4. Enter the new name for the category, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.TIP You can group the records in two or more categories into one category by giving the categories the same name. For example, if you change the name of the Personal category to Business, all records formerly in the Personal category appear in the Business category.Finding informationYour handheld offers several ways to find information quickly:■All applications that reside on your handheld: Find locates any text that you specify, always starting with the current application. However, Find does not search through applications on expansion cards.■Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad: Phone Lookup displays the Address list screen and enables you to add to a record the information that appears in this list.■Address Book: The Look Up line enables you to scroll immediately to a name when you enter the first letters of that name.■Expense: Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record.Looking up Address Book recordsIn Address Book, you can use the Look Up line with the stylus or the navigator to look up and quickly scroll to any of your Address Book entries.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks55To look up an Address Book record with the stylus:1. From the Address list screen, enter the first letter of the name you want to find.The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter. If you write another letter, the list scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For example, writing an s scrolls to “Sands,” and writing sm scrolls further to “Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Look Up feature scrolls to the first letter of the company name.2. Tap the record to view its contents.To look up an Address Book record with the navigator:1. From the Address List screen, press Right on the navigator to display the navigator Quick Look Up line.2. Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the first letter of the name you want to find.The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter.3. Press Right on the navigator to move to the next letter box.The Quick Look Up line displays only letters that are a possible match for that position. If only one match is possible for a particular position, the highlight jumps to the next position.Look Up lineQuick Look Up lineDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications564. Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the next letter of the name you want to find.The list then scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For example, selecting s scrolls to “Sands,” and selecting sm scrolls further to “Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Quick Look Up feature scrolls to the matches for the company name.5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the entry you want appears in the list.6. Press Select on the navigator to highlight the record you want.7. Press Select on the navigator to view the contents of the selected record.TIP If only one match is possible for the letters you selected, the contents of the record displays automatically.Using FindYou can use Find to locate any text that you specify, in any application that resides on your handheld. Find does not search applications that reside on an expansion card.To use Find:1. Press Function + Find .TIP If you select text in an application before you tap Find, the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box.2. Enter the text that you want to find. Find is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for the name “davidson” also finds “Davidson.”Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter. For example, searching for “plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.”3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. Find searches for the text in all records and all notes.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks57As your handheld searches for the text, you can tap Stop at any time. You may want to do this if the entry you want appears before your handheld finishes the search. To continue the search after you tap Stop, tap Find More.4. Tap the text that you want to review.Using Phone LookupPhone Lookup displays the Address list screen and enables you to add the information that appears in this list to a record.To use Phone Lookup:1. Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number. The record can be in Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, or any other application that takes advantage of this feature.2. Press Command Stroke + L.Alternately, press Function + Menu and then select Phone Lookup on the Options menu.3. Begin to spell the last name of the name you want to find. The list scrolls to the first record in the list that starts with the first letter you enter. Continue to spell the name you’re looking for, or when you see the name, tap it. 4. Tap Add.The name you selected, along with the other information associated with it, is pasted into the record you selected in step 1.Looking up names to add to Expense recordsIn Expense, Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications58To add names to an Expense record:1. Tap the Expense record to which you want to add names.2. Tap Details.3. Tap Who.4. Tap Lookup.The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field.5. Select the name you want to add, and then tap Add.The name appears in the Attendees screen.6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more names.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Sorting lists of recordsYou can sort lists of records in various ways, depending on the application. Sorting is available in applications that have list screens: Address Book, Note Pad, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense.NOTE You can also assign records to categories. See “Categorizing records” earlier in this chapter.Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks59To sort records in Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad:1. Open the application to display the list screen.2. Press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the Options menu.3. Do one of the following:Address Book: Tap the setting you want.Note Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic, Date, or Manual.Memo Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or Manual.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To sort the Note Pad and Memo list manually, tap and drag a note or memo to a new location in the list. To make the list appear in Palm Desktop software as you manually sorted it on your handheld, open the application in Palm Desktop software and click Sort by. Then select Order on Handheld.To sort records in To Do List and Expense:1. Open the application to display the list screen.2. Tap Show.3. Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Address BookNote PadMemo PadDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications60Attaching notesIn Address Book, Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you can attach a note to a record. A note can be up to several thousand characters long. For example, for an appointment in Date Book, you can attach a note with directions to the location.To attach a note to a record:1. Display the entry to which you want to add a note. To display an entry, tap it or press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight it, and then press Select on the navigator.2. In Address Book only: Tap Edit.3. Tap Details. 4. Tap Note.5. Enter your note.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note.To review or edit a note:■Tap the Note icon .TIP In Date Book, you can also select the event that contains the note, press Select on the navigator to open the note, and then press Select on the navigator again to close the note. To delete a note:1. Tap the Note icon .2. Tap Delete.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Yes.Note iconDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks61Choosing fontsIn many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. You can choose small, small bold, large, or large bold fonts in each application that enables you to change font style.To change the font style:1. Open an application.2. Press Command Stroke + F.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Font on the Options menu.3. Tap the font style you want to use.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Small fontLarge fontSmall bold fontLarge bold fontTap here for small fontTap here for small bold fontTap here for large bold fontTap here for large fontDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications62Receiving alertsYou can receive alerts on your handheld and in Palm Desktop software.Receiving alerts on your handheldWhen you use certain application settings, your handheld can alert you to any of the following:■An appointment set in Date Book■A note created in Note Pad■An alarm set in World ClockWhen an alert occurs, your handheld displays a reminder message. If you tap Snooze in response to an alert message, your handheld reminds you of the item again in five minutes. The Reminder screen displays alerts that await attention. To respond to alerts, do one of the following:■Select an item’s check box to clear the item.■Tap an item (either the icon or the text description) to open the application where the alarm was set. The application opens to the entry associated with the alarm.■Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to close the reminder list and return to the current screen. An attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen; tap it to view the alert list again.■Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes.If you tap Done or Snooze and view the reminder list later, the current time is displayed in the Reminder bar and the original alert time is displayed with each list item. ■Tap Clear All to dismiss all alerts in the list.Receiving alerts from Palm Desktop softwareYou can also set an option to receive Date Book event alerts from Palm Desktop software. The feature is disabled by default, so you must enable it within Palm Desktop software.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications63To enable an event alert from Palm Desktop software:1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon.2. From the Tools menu, select Options, and then select Alarms.3. Set Alarm Configuration options, either Always Available or Available only when the Palm Desktop is running.4. (Optional) To hear an alert sound as well as receive an alert message, select the check box Play audible notification with alarm dialog.5. Click OK.Hiding or masking private recordsYou can use the Security preferences to set a password and select whether to mask your private records or hide them completely. See “Security preferences” in Chapter 18 for details.Installing and removing applicationsThis section explains how to install and remove applications and other files on your handheld or on an expansion card, and how to remove Palm Desktop software from your computer.Installing files and add-on applicationsYour handheld comes with applications installed and ready to use, but you can also install additional applications, such as games and other software, on your handheld or on a card that is seated in the expansion card slot. Applications or games that you install on your handheld reside in RAM memory, and you can delete them at any time. You can also install other files such as photos or MP3 audio files. Both applications and files are easy to install during a HotSync operation.There are a variety of third-party applications available for your handheld. To learn more about these applications, go to the web site: www.palm.com.NOTE Palm works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld. Some third-party applications, however, may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld. If you suspect that a third-party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld, contact the developer of the application. In addition, Palm, Inc. has information about some applications' compatibility with your handheld. To find this information, do one of the following:■Go to www.palm.com/support/. Click the link for information about your handheld, and then find the information on compatibility of third-party applications.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications64■Read the readme file for your handheld. After you install Palm Desktop software on your computer, open the Palm folder. The readme file is located in the Helpnote folder.Installing applications and files on a Windows computerPalm Quick Install makes it easy to install applications and files during a HotSync operation. Depending on the file type, Palm Quick Install determines whether to install the files on your handheld or on an expansion card. With Palm Quick Install you can install the following types of files:■Palm files types, including PRC, PDB, PQA, PNC, and SCP■ZIP files■Image files, including BMP, JPEG, TIFF, and GIF■Audio files, including MP3, WAV, AAC, and RMJ■Video files, including MP4, MPG, and AVIYou can use any of the following methods to install applications and files with Palm Quick Install:■Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.■Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install window.■Use the commands or buttons in the Palm Quick Install window.The procedures that follow explain how to install applications and files using each of these methods.To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install icon:1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your computer.2. From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the file(s) or folder that you want to install.3. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder on to the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.Palm Quick Install displays a status dialog box that shows whether the files will be installed on your handheld or an expansion card. 4. Click OK.If the selected files are compatible, the files are placed in the Handheld or Expansion Card queue based on the file extension. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications65If the files are incompatible, a message asks if you want to add the files to the queue. Click Yes to add the files to the expansion card queue.5. Perform a HotSync operation to install the files.To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install window:1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your computer.2. Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.3. From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the file(s) or folder that you want to install.4. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder on to the handheld or expansion card queue.If you drag an incompatible file to the handheld queue, a status dialog box asks if you want to install the file on the expansion card. Click Yes to place the file in the queue.5. Perform a HotSync operation to install the files.Handheld queueExpansion card queueDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications66To install add-on software on your handheld using a Windows computer:1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your computer.2. Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.3. In the User drop-down list, select the name that corresponds to your handheld.4. Click Add.TIP To install a folder, open the File menu and select Add Folder.5. Select the application(s) or file(s) that you want to install.6. Click OK.If you selected any files that are incompatible with the handheld, a status dialog box asks if you want to install the file on the expansion card. Click Yes to place the file in the queue.7. If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, drag the files to move applications between the handheld and expansion card queue.8. Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application(s). See “Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other than the Palm™ application files. For your handheld to recognize such a file, you must first launch the associated application at least once.User drop-down listAdd buttonDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications67Palm Quick Install Tips■Audio and video files are automatically placed in the expansion card queue.■When you drag and drop a folder that has subfolders, Palm Quick Install only looks at the files one folder below the selected folder.■To install files in a different location, start Palm Quick Install and drag the files to a different queue.■You can also access the Palm Quick Install window by clicking Install on the Palm Desktop launch bar.Installing applications and files on a Mac computerThe Install Tool makes it easy to install applications and files during a HotSync operation. You can specify whether to install the files on your handheld or on an expansion card. You can use the Install Tool to install the following types of files:■Palm files types, including PRC, PDB, PQA, PNC, and SCP■Image files, including BMP, JPEG, TIFF, and GIF■Audio files, including MP3, Real Audio RA8, and Gecko■Video filesTo install add-on software on your handheld using a Mac computer:1. On your Mac computer, copy or download the application you want to install into the Add-on folder in your Palm folder.2. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.3. From the HotSync menu, select Install Handheld Files.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications684. From the User pop-up menu, select the name that corresponds to your handheld.5. Click Add To List.If the file you want to install is not listed in the dialog box, go to the folder to which you copied the file. Most handheld application files have the extension PRC, PDB, PQA, or SCP.6. Select the application(s) you want to install.7. Click Add File to add the selected application to the Install Handheld Files list.TIP You can also drag files or folders of files to the list in the Install Handheld Files dialog box. The files are copied to the Files To Install folder.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications698. If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, click Change Destination in the Install Handheld Files window, and then use the arrows to move applications between your handheld and an expansion card.9. Click OK to close the Change Destination window.10. Close the Install Handheld Files window.11. Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application(s) on your handheld. See “Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other than the Palm application files. For your handheld to recognize such a file, you must first launch the associated application at least once. Removing applicationsIf you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you installed, you can remove applications from your handheld or from an expansion card. From your handheld, you can remove only add-on applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications that reside in the ROM portion of your handheld.To remove an add-on application: 1. Tap the Home icon . 2. Tap the Menu icon . 3. Select Delete on the App menu.4. Tap the Delete From pick list and select either Handheld or Card. If you want to delete applications from a card, the card must be seated in the expansion card slot.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications705. Tap the application that you want to remove.6. Tap Delete.7. Tap Yes.8. Tap Done.Removing Palm Desktop softwareIf you no longer want to use Palm Desktop software, you can remove it from your computer. This process removes only the application files. The data in your Users folder remains untouched. NOTE You may need to modify the steps shown here to accommodate the version of the operating system installed on your computer.To remove Palm Desktop software from a Windows computer: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings and then click Control Panel.2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Click the Change or Remove Programs button.4. Select Palm Desktop.5. Click Change/Remove.This process removes only the application files. The data in your Users folder remains untouched. 6. Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box.7. Click OK.8. Click Close.NOTE If you want to synchronize data with another personal information manager (PIM) you need to install the HotSync Manager from the Desktop Software CD-ROM. During the installation select the Custom option and then choose to install only HotSync Manager.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications71To remove Palm Desktop software from a Mac computer: 1. Insert the Desktop Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive on your computer.2. Double-click the Desktop Software CD-ROM icon on your desktop. 3. Double-click the Palm Desktop Installer icon.4. From the Easy Install screen, select Uninstall from the pop-up menu.5. Select the software you want to remove.6. Click Uninstall.7. Select the folder that contains your Palm Desktop software files.8. Click Remove.9. Restart your computer.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications72DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
73CHAPTER 5Using Address BookAddress Book enables you to keep names, addresses, phone numbers, and other information about your personal or business contacts. Use Address Book to do the following: ■Quickly look up or enter names, addresses, phone numbers, and other information.■Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, mobile, and so on) or e-mail addresses for each name.■Define which phone number appears in the Address list for each Address Book entry. ■Attach a note to each Address Book entry, in which you can enter additional information about the entry.■Assign Address Book entries to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.■Create your own digital business card that you can beam using e-mail to other devices with an infrared (IR) port.NOTE You can encrypt your Address Book entries. For more information, see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.To open Address Book: ■Press the Address Book application button on the front panel of your handheld. Address Book opens to display the list of all your records.Address Book button DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book74TIP Press the Address Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have records. You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly beam your business card to another device with an IR port. The receiving device must also have an application that can read the Address Book data.Creating an Address Book entryA record in Address Book is called an entry. You can create entries on your handheld, or you can use Palm™ Desktop software to create entries on your computer and then transfer the entries to your handheld with your next HotSync® operation.Palm Desktop software also has data import capabilities so that you can load database files into Address Book on your handheld. See “Importing data” in Chapter 3 and Palm Desktop online Help for more information.To create a new Address Book entry:1. Press the Address Book button on the front of your handheld to display the Address list.2. Tap New.3. Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Address Book. The handheld automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field (except numeric and e-mail fields). You do not have to use the CAPS key to capitalize the first letter of the name.4. Tap the First Name field.TIP Pressing Tab moves the cursor to the next field.5. Enter the first name of the person in the First Name field.6. Enter the other information that you want to include in this entry.Tap NewCursor at Last nameDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Selecting types of phone numbers75As you enter letters in the Title, Company, City, and State fields, text appears for the first logical match that exists in your Address Book. As you enter more letters, a closer match appears. For example, you may already have Sacramento and San Francisco in your Address Book. As you enter S, Sacramento appears, and as you continue entering a and n San Francisco replaces Sacramento. As soon as the word you want appears, tap the next field to accept the word.7. Tap the scroll arrows or press Up/Down on the navigator to move to the next page of information.8. After you finish entering information, Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.TIP To create an entry that always appears at the top of the Address list, begin the Last name or Company field with a symbol, as in *If Found Call*. This entry can contain contact information in case you lose your handheld.Selecting types of phone numbersYou can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that you associate with an Address Book entry. Any changes you make apply only to the current entry. To select other types of phone numbers in an entry:1. Tap the entry that you want to change. 2. Tap Edit.Tap DoneDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book763. Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change. 4. Select a new label.Changing Address Entry detailsThe Address Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that you can associate with an entry. To open the Address Entry Details dialog box:1. Tap the entry whose details you want to change.2. Tap Edit.3. Tap Details.4. Select any of the following settings:Tap triangleShow in List Select which type of phone or other information appears in the Address list screen. Your options are Work, Home, Fax, Other, E-mail, Main, Pager, and Mobile. The identifying letters W, H, F, O, M, or P appear next to the record in the Address list, depending on which information is displayed. If you select E-mail, no identifying letter is displayed.Category Assign the entry to a category. Private Hide this entry when Security is turned on.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Address Book menus77Address Book menusAddress Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Address Book features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands.The Record and Options menus may differ, depending on whether you’re displaying the Address list screen or the Address view screen.Record menusDuplicate Address Makes a copy of the current record and displays the copy in Address Edit so you can make changes to the copied record. The copy has the same category and attached notes as the original record.Connect Opens the Quick Connect dialog box where you can select which application to use to make the connection. Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can select how to send all records in the selected category to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Send Address Opens a dialog box where you can select how to send the selected entry to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Address list Address viewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book78Options menusPreferencesRemember last category: Determines how Address Book appears when you return to it from another application. If you select this check box, Address Book shows the last category you selected. If you clear it, Address Book displays the All category.Rename Custom Fields Fields that appear at the end of the Address Edit screen. Rename them to identify the kind of information you enter in them. The names you give the custom fields appear in all entries. About Address Book Shows version information for Address Book.Address list Address viewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
79CHAPTER 6Using CalculatorCalculator enables you to perform basic calculations. Use Calculator to do the following:■Perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root operations.■Store and retrieve values.■Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming a series of “chain” calculations.To open Calculator:1. Press Home . 2. Tap the Calculator icon .Performing calculationsThe Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations. Clears the entire calculation so that you can begin a fresh calculation.Clears the last number you entered. If you make a mistake while entering a number in the middle of a calculation, you can use this button to reenter the number without starting the calculation over.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 6 Using Calculator80Viewing recent calculationsThe Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of calculations and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain” calculations.To display recent calculations:1. Press Command Stroke + l.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Recent Calculations on the Options menu.2. After you finish reviewing the calculations, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value. If you want to enter a negative number, enter the number first and then press the +/- button.Places the current number in memory. Each new number you enter with the M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. The number that you add can be either a calculated value or any number you enter by pressing the number buttons. Pressing this button has no effect on the current calculation (or series of calculations); it merely places the value into memory until it is recalled.Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it into the current calculation.Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory.Calculates the square root of a number. Enter the number, and then tap the square root button.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Calculator menus81Using Calculator menusThe Calculator menu shown here is for your reference, and the Calculator feature described here is not explained elsewhere in this book.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.Options menuAbout Calculator Shows version information for Calculator.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 6 Using Calculator82DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
83CHAPTER 7Using Card InfoCard Info enables you to review general information about an expansion card. Use Card Info to do the following:■Review card contents.■Rename a card.■Format a card.Reviewing Card InformationYou can view the card name, type, available storage space, and a summary of its contents.To review Card Information:1. Press Home .2. Tap the Card Info icon .3. Review Card name, Type, and Size.4. Review card contents summarized by directory.Review card informationReview summarized card contentsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 7 Using Card Info84Renaming a cardRenaming a card enables you to give an easy to recognize name to the card.To rename a card:1. Press Home .2. Tap the Card Info icon .3. Press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Rename Card on the Card menu.4. Enter the new name for the card.5. Tap Rename.Formatting a cardFormatting a card destroys all its data and prepares it to accept new applications and data.To format a card:1. Press Home .2. Tap the Card Info icon .3. Press Command Stroke + F.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Format Card on the Card menu.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Managing an expansion card85Managing an expansion card■When writing data to an expansion card, wait for your handheld to complete the operation before removing the card from the slot. This prevents data corruption or accidental damage to the expansion card.■You can install applications to an expansion card after performing an initial HotSync® operation. See “Installing files and add-on applications” in Chapter 4 for information. For optimal performance, we recommend that you do not install more than fifty applications to a single expansion card.■When your handheld’s battery level becomes very low, access to the expansion card may be disabled to protect your data. If this occurs, recharge your handheld as soon as possible.Using the Card Info menuThe Card Info menu is shown here for your reference, and the Card Info features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.Help Provides help text.About Card Info Shows version information for Card Info.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 7 Using Card Info86DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
87CHAPTER 8Using Date BookDate Book enables you to quickly and easily schedule appointments or any kind of activity associated with a time and date. Use Date Book to do the following:■Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and date.■Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week. The Week view makes it easy to spot available times and potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts.■Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning, lunch, or afternoon appointments.■Display an agenda showing appointments, untimed events, and your To Do items for the day.■Set an alarm to notify you of the scheduled activity. ■Create reminders for events that are based on a particular date, rather than time of day. Birthdays and anniversaries are easy to track with your handheld.■Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry in your Date Book.NOTE You can encrypt your Date Book records. For more information, see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.To open Date Book:■Press the Date Book application button on the front panel of your handheld. Date Book opens to today’s schedule.TIP Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views.Date Book buttonDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book88When you open Date Book, the screen shows the current date and a list of times for a normal business day. Scheduling an eventA record in Date Book is called an “event.” An event can be any kind of activity that you associate with a day. You can enter a new event on any of the available time lines. When you schedule an event, its description appears on the time line, and its duration is automatically set to one hour. You can easily change the start time and duration for any event.It’s possible to schedule events that overlap, but Date Book makes it easy to find such conflicts. See “Spotting event conflicts” later in this chapter.You can also schedule events in your Date Book that occur on a particular date but have no specific start or end times, such as birthdays, holidays, and anniversaries. These are referred to as “untimed events.” Untimed events appear at the top of the list of times, marked with a diamond. You can have more than one untimed event on a particular date.You can also schedule a repeating event, such as a weekly meeting, and continuous events, such as a three-day conference or a vacation.To schedule an event for the current day:1. Tap the time line that corresponds to the beginning of the event.2. Enter a description of the event. You can enter up to 255 characters.Tap a time lineEnter event Time bar shows durationDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling an event893. If the event is one hour long, skip to step 5. If the event is longer or shorter than an hour, tap the time of the event to open the Set Time dialog box. 4. Do one of the following:– Tap the time columns on the right side of the Set Time dialog to set the Start Time, and then tap the End Time box and tap the time columns to set the End Time.– Tap All Day to automatically insert the start and end time of the event as defined in your Date Book preferences.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event. A vertical line appears next to the time, indicating the duration of the event.If an event has the same start and end time, the time is displayed only once.Tap the time of an eventStart Time highlightedTap to scroll to earlier hoursTap to scroll to later hoursTap to change hoursTap to change minutesTap to automatically fill the start and end timesDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book90To schedule an event for another day:1. Select the date you want for the event by doing one of the following: – Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the screen. If necessary, tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to another week.– Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous day.– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current day.– Tap Go To at the bottom of the screen to open the Go to Date dialog box. Select a date by tapping a year, month, and day in the calendar.2. After you locate the date, follow the steps for scheduling an event for the current day.To schedule an untimed event: 1. Select the date that you want for the event.2. Tap New.3. Tap No Time, so that no start or end times are defined for the new event.Previous weekNext weekTap to select a day of the current weekPrevious yearNext yearTap to select current dateTap to select a monthTap to select a dayDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Selecting an event914. Enter a description of the event.5. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event.If you create an event and decide later that there is no particular start or end time, you can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the time of the event in the Date Book screen, tap No Time, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Selecting an eventAfter you create an event, you can select an event to view its contents, reschedule it, make it a repeating event, and add alarms or notes. To select an event:1. Go to the day on which the event is scheduled.2. Tap the event.TIP You can also press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight on the next event in the current day or on the first event of another day. To scroll through the events in the selected day, press Up and Down on the navigator. Rescheduling an eventYou can easily make changes to your schedule with your handheld. To reschedule an event:1. Select the event you want to reschedule.2. Tap Details.3. To change the time, tap the Time box and select a new time.4. To change the date, tap the Date box and select a new date.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.No time selectedNew untimed eventDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book92Setting an alarm for an eventThe Alarm setting enables you to set an alarm for events in your Date Book. You can set an alarm to notify you minutes, hours, or days before an event. The default Alarm setting is five minutes before the time of the event, but you can change the Alarm to any number of minutes, hours, or days.When you set an alarm, this icon appears to the far right of the event with the alarm. When the alarm occurs, a reminder message also appears onscreen.To set an alarm for an event:1. Select the event to which you want to assign an alarm.2. Tap Details.3. Tap the Alarm check box to select it.The default setting, 5 Minutes, appears.4. Tap the pick list to select Minutes, Hours, or Days.5. Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the number of time units.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.7. When the reminder message appears on screen, do one of the following:– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK, to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen.– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. The reminder message appears again five minutes after you tap Snooze, and meanwhile an attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm.Tap here to select unit of timeEnter number of time units hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling repeating or continuous events93– Tap Go To to open Date Book. Date Book opens and displays the event associated with the alarm. Alarm for untimed events: You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. In this case, the alarm triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours, or days before midnight (beginning) of the day of the untimed event. When the alarm triggers, the reminder list displays the alarm message until you clear it. See “Receiving alerts” in Chapter 4 for details.For example, you might set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on February 4. If the alarm is set for five minutes, the reminder message appears at 11:55 PM on the night of February 3. The reminder remains in the reminder list until you turn on your handheld and dismiss it.Scheduling repeating or continuous eventsThe Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular intervals or extend over a period of consecutive days. A birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually. Another example is a weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time of day. A business trip or a vacation is an example of a continuous event.To schedule a repeating or continuous event:1. Select the event.2. Tap Details.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book943. Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box.4. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often the event repeats.For a continuous event, tap Day.5. On the Every line, enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to repeat. For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event repeats every other month.6. To specify an end date for the repeating or continuous event, tap the End on pick list and tap Choose Date. Use the date picker to select an end date.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.After you schedule a repeating or continuous event, the Repeat icon appears to the far right of the event.Tap the Repeat boxDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling repeating or continuous events95Changing repeating or continuous eventsWhen you make changes to a repeating or continuous event, such as deleting or adding notes or changing the time of an event, you can decide which of the events you want to change—all events in the series, just the current event, or the current and future events. To delete repeating events:1. Select the record you want to delete.2. Press Function + Menu .3. Select Record, and then select Delete Event.4. Do one of the following:– Tap Current to delete only the current event item.– Tap Future to delete the current and all future event items and reset the end date of the repeating event to the last shown date.– Tap All to delete all occurrences of the repeating event.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Considerations for repeating or continuous eventsKeep the following points in mind:■If you change the start date of a repeating event, your handheld calculates the number of days you moved the event. Your handheld then automatically changes the end date to maintain the duration of the repeating event.■If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) are not changed, and your handheld creates a new repeating event.■If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from January 14th to January 15th) and apply the change to all occurrences, the new date becomes the start date of the repeating event. Your handheld adjusts the end date to maintain the duration of the event. If you apply the change to current and future occurrences, past occurrences are not changed.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book96■If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a repeating event and apply the change to all occurrences, your handheld creates a new event. The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is changed. ■If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon .Changing the Date Book viewIn addition to displaying the time list for a specific day, you can also display a whole week, a month, an agenda, and the current time. To cycle through Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views:■Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to display the next view.■Tap the appropriate view icon in the lower-left corner of Date Book.Working in Week viewWeek view shows the calendar of your events for an entire week. This view lets you quickly review your appointments and available time slots. In addition, the graphical display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.To display the Week view:1. Tap the Week view icon.2. Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a time, or tap on a column to display details of an event. The Week view also shows untimed events and events that are before and after the range of times shown. Untimed repeating events appear in green.Week viewPrevious week Next weekTap for that dayBar indicates earlier event Bar indicates later event Diamond indicates untimed eventDashed line indicates repeating eventDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Changing the Date Book view973. Tap an event to show a description of the event.Tips for using Week viewKeep the following points in mind:■To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or day.■Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time selected for a new event. ■Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week view to move directly to that day without selecting an event.■Press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous week.■Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Right and Left to select a day within the selected week. To view the events on the selected day, press Select on the navigator again.■The Week view shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in the Date Book Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time span, a bar appears at the top or bottom of that day’s column. Use the onscreen scroll arrows to scroll to the event, or press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll to earlier and later time slots within the selected week. Working in Month viewThe Month view screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines in the Month view indicate events, repeating events, and untimed events.Event detailsTap to show event detailsPrevious/next monthDashes on right side indicate eventsDashed line below date indicates continuous eventDiamond below date indicates untimed eventMonth view buttonDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book98You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month view. See “Display Options” later in this chapter.Tips for using Month viewKeep the following points in mind:■Tap a day in the Month view to display that day in the Day view.■Tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner, or press Left and Right on the navigator, to move forward or backward a month. ■Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Left and Right on the navigator to scroll to a specific day. Press Select on the navigator to display that day in the Day view.■Untimed repeating events appear in green.Working in Agenda viewThe Agenda view shows you your untimed events, appointments, and To Do items in one screen. When you tap an untimed event or appointment in the Agenda view, the Day view appears so you can see more detailed information about the event. You can tap the check box next to a To Do item to mark it as completed. When you tap on a To Do item, your To Do list appears. NOTE The To Do items that appear and how you can change them depends on the settings in your To Do preferences. See “Setting To Do Preferences” in Chapter 13 for more information.To display the Agenda view:1. Tap the Agenda view icon.2. Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a day at a time, or to display more events and To Do items. TIP You can also press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the events on the selected day, or press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous day. Agenda viewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Spotting event conflicts99NOTE You can also change the category of To Do items shown. Tap on the pick list to choose another category. See Chapter 13 for more information on working with To Do items.Spotting event conflictsWith the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it’s possible to schedule events that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week View as overlapping bars. The first event created appears as a gray bar, and any subsequent conflicting events appear as a single red bar. The Day View displays overlapping red brackets to the left of the conflicting times. The Month View displays conflicting appointments in red.Date Book menus, preferences, and display optionsDate Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Date Book features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.Event conflictsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book100Record menuOptions menuDisplay OptionsAllows you to change Date Book’s appearance and which events are displayed.Send Event Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected event to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Show Time Bars Activates the time bars that appear in the Day view. The time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate event conflicts.Compress Day view Controls how times appear in the Day view. When Compress Day view is off, all time slots are displayed. When it is on, start and end times are displayed for each event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling. Month view settings These check boxes apply to the Month view of the Date Book. You can deactivate any or all of these settings to hide Timed, Untimed, or Daily Repeating events in the Month view only.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options101PreferencesAbout Date BookShows version information for Date Book.Start/End Time Defines the start and end times for Date Book screens. If the time slots you select do not fit on one screen, you can tap the scroll arrows to scroll up and down.Alarm Preset Automatically sets an alarm for each new event. The silent alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight at the end of the date of the event.Alarm Sound Sets the tone of the alarm.Remind Me Defines how many times the alarm occurs after the initial occurrence. The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times.Play Every Defines how often the alarm sounds. The choices are Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book102DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
103CHAPTER 9Using ExpenseExpense enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer. In Expense you can do the following: ■Record dates, types of expenses, amount spent, payment method, and other details associated with any money that you spend.■Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.■Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with each expense.■Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category.■Sort your expenses by date or expense type.■Send or export your expense information to popular computer applications, such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word, using Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology on a Windows computer.IMPORTANT To access Expense, you must first perform a HotSync operation with your handheld. Expense is automatically loaded onto your handheld during the first HotSync operation. To open Expense:1. Press Home .2. Select the Expense icon . DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense104Adding expense itemsA record in Expense is called an item. You can sort your Expense items into categories or add other information that you want to associate with the item.1. Tap New.2. Enter the amount of the expense. 3. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list.As soon as you select an expense type, your handheld saves your entry. If you do not select an expense type, it does not save the entry.TIP Another quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no Expense item is selected in the Expense list, type the first letter(s) of the expense type, and then type the numerical amount of the Expense item. This technique takes advantage of the automatic fill feature. See “Options menu” later in this chapter for details.Tap NewCursor of new itemTap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding expense items105Changing the date of an Expense itemInitially, Expense items appear with the date on which you enter them. You can change the date associated with any Expense item.To change the date of an Expense item:1. Tap the Expense item you want to change.2. Tap the date of the selected item. 3. Tap the new date.Entering receipt detailsExpense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item. These options appear in the Receipt Details dialog box.To open the Receipt Details dialog box:1. Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details.2. Tap Details.3. Select any of the following options:Tap dateCategory Opens a pick list of system and user-defined categories. See “Categorizing records” in Chapter 4 for more information.Type Opens a pick list of expense types. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense1064. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.Customizing the Currency pick listYou can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency pick list.To customize the Currency pick list:1. Tap the Currency pick list in the Receipt Details dialog box, and then select Edit currencies.2. Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency you want to display on that line.3. Press Function + Enter or tap OK to close the Select Currencies dialog box.4. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.Payment Enables you to choose the payment method used to pay the Expense item. If the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets supplied by your company), you can choose Prepaid to place your expense in the appropriate company-paid cell of your printed expense report.Currency Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the Expense item. The default currency unit is defined in the Preferences dialog box. You can also display up to four other common types of currency. See “Customizing the Currency pick list” later in this chapter for more information.Vendor and City Enables you to record the name of the vendor (usually a company) associated with the expense and the city where the expense was incurred. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe (Vendor) in San Francisco (City).Attendees See “Looking up names to add to Expense records” in Chapter 4 for more information.Tap Edit currenciesDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing the Currency pick list107Changing the default currencyYou can select which currency appears by default when you’re entering Expense items. You can override this setting when entering individual expense items.To change your default currency:1. Open Expense.2. Press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the Options menu.3. Tap the Default Currency pick list.4. Select the currency symbol that you want to appear in Expense.5. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.Defining a custom currency symbolIf the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, you can create your own custom country and currency symbol. To define a custom currency symbol:1. Press Command Stroke + Y.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Custom Currencies on the Options menu.2. Tap one of the four Country boxes.Tap a Country boxDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense1083. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to appear in Expense.4. Press Function + Enter or tap OK to close the Currency Properties dialog box.5. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.NOTE If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all Expense items, select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box. If you want to use your custom currency symbol only for a particular Expense item, select the symbol in the Receipt Details dialog box associated with that item.Setting Show OptionsShow Options defines the sort order and other settings that relate to your Expense items.To open the Show Options dialog box:1. In the Expense list, tap Show.2. Select any of the options.3. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.Sort by Enables you to sort expense items by date or type.Distance Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers.Show currency Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list.Tap ShowDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Working with Expense data on your computer109Working with Expense data on your computerAfter you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your handheld and perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the following on your computer. See the Palm Desktop software online help for details. This feature is not avaialble on Mac computers.■Add, modify, and delete your Expense data.■Organize your Expense data by category, amount, date, type, or notes.■View Expense data in various formats: List, Large Icons, or Small Icons.■Record individual expenses in various currencies and display the total in one selected currency type.■Print Expense reports.■Transfer Expense data to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the Send command or Export command, and import data in popular file formats.Displaying the euro on your computerWhen you perform a HotSync operation, the euro symbol is transferred to Palm Desktop software like any other piece of data on your handheld. The symbol appears in Palm Desktop software, however, only if you are using fonts that support the euro symbol.These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more information refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop computer’s operating system. Printing the euroEven with operating system support, problems may arise when you print documents that contain the euro. When a font is present on both the printer and the computer, the printer font is used by default to increase printing speed. If the printer font does not include the euro, a box is printed instead of the euro symbol.These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop computer’s operating system. Using Expense menusExpense menus are shown here for your reference, and Expense features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense110Record menuOptions menuPreferences Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can select automatic fill and default currency options.Use automatic fill. Enables you to select an expense type by typing the first letter of an expense type. For example, if you type the letter T, it enters the “Taxi” expense type. Typing T and then E enters Telephone, which is the first expense type beginning with the letters TE. About Expense Shows version information for Expense.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
111CHAPTER 10Using Memo PadMemo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with records in Date Book, Address Book, or To Do List. The number of memos you can store is dependent only on the memory available on your handheld. Use Memo Pad to do the following:■Send memos to popular computer applications like Microsoft Word when you synchronize using Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology.■Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.■Write down phone numbers and other types of information that you can later copy and paste into other applications. NOTE You can encrypt your Memo Pad memos. For more information, see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.To open Memo Pad:1. Press Home . 2. Tap the Memo Pad icon . Creating memosA record in Memo Pad is called a memo. You can assign memos to categories and mark them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a memo.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 10 Using Memo Pad112To create a new memo:1. Open Memo Pad.2. Tap New.TIP In the Memo list screen, you can also begin typing to create a new memo. The first letter is automatically capitalized and begins your new memo. If you have a memo open, you can press Command Stroke + N.3. Enter the text that you want to appear in the memo. 4. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done. Reviewing memosThe first line of a memo appears in the Memo list. This makes it easy to locate and review your memos. To review a memo:1. In the Memo list, select the text of the memo.TIP You can also select, review, and move between memos with the navigator. See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.2. Review or edit the text in the memo. 3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap NewSelect a memo to reviewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Memo Pad menus113Using Memo Pad menusMemo Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Memo Pad features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you’re displaying the Memo list or an individual memo.Record menusOptions menusSend Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send all records in the selected category to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Send Memo Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send the selected memo to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Memo listMemo screenPreferences Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box, where you define the sort order for memos. About Memo Pad Shows version information for Memo Pad.Memo list Memo screenDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 10 Using Memo Pad114DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
115CHAPTER 11Using Note PadNote Pad provides a place to take notes in your own handwriting. You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil. Use Note Pad to do the following:■Take notes, draw a sketch, or write any kind of message directly on your handheld screen. Later, you can enter this information into other applications. ■Set an alarm to use your notes as reminder messages. ■Assign notes to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.■Exchange notes with other devices that have Note Pad 2.0 installed.■Use Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology to copy and paste notes into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word, or to send notes as e-mail attachments. NOTE You can encrypt your Note pad notes. For more information, see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.To open Note Pad: 1. Press Home .2. Select the Note Pad icon . DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad116Creating a noteA record in Note Pad is called a note. You can assign notes to categories and mark them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a note.To create a new note:1. Tap New.2. Write the information directly on the handheld screen.Tap the pen selector to select a different pen width, or select the eraser to remove unwanted strokes.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.To clear the screen:1. Press Function + Menu . 2. Select Edit, and then select Clear Note.Reviewing notesThe note title and the date you created the note appear in the Note Pad list. If you did not assign a title to your note, the time you created the note appears as the note title. This makes it easy to locate and review your notes. To review a note:1. In the Note Pad list, select the note title.TIP You can also select, review, and move between notes with the navigator. See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.Pen selectorWrite information hereEnter title hereEraserDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Changing Note Pad color settings1172. Review or edit the contents of the note. 3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Changing Note Pad color settingsBy default, your notes appear with a white “paper” background, and the ink from the pen is blue. You can change the color of both the paper and the ink from the pen. Your color selections apply to all your notes. You cannot change the color settings for individual notes.To set the colors:1. In the Note Pad list, press Command Stroke + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the Options menu.2. Tap Color.3. Tap Pen, and then tap the color of ink you want to use.4. Tap Paper, and then tap the color of paper you want to use.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap arrows to scroll to next and previous notesSelect a note to view DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad118Setting an alarm for a noteYou can set an alarm for a specific time and date to remind you to follow up on anote.To set an alarm for a note:1. Tap the note to which you want to assign an alarm.2. Press Command Stroke + A.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Alarm on the Options menu.3. Tap the Date box.4. Tap the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound.After you tap the date, the Set Alarm dialog box reappears.5. Tap the Time box.6. Tap the hour and minute columns to select the time you want the alarm to occur.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap here to select monthTap here to select yearTap here to select dateTap here to select minutesTap here to select hourDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Note Pad menus1198. When the alarm goes off and the reminder message appears onscreen, do one of the following:– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen.– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in five minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time appears in the Reminder bar and the note title appears on the screen. – If you did not title the note, the time the note was created appears on the screen.– Tap Go To to open Note Pad. Note Pad will open and display the note associated with the alarm.Using Note Pad menusNote Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Note Pad features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.The Record menu is the same when you’re viewing the Note Pad list and an individual note. The Options menu differs depending on whether you’re viewing the Note Pad list or an individual note.Record menuSend Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad120Options menusSend Note Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected note to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Compatibility Displays the Compatibility dialog box, where you can choose to beam notes to a previous version of Note Pad. Preferences Displays the Note Pad Preferences dialog box, where you define the pen and paper color, the sort order for notes, and the alarm sound. Details Displays the Note Details dialog box, where you assign a category and privacy option for a note.About Note Pad Shows version information for Note Pad.Note Pad list Note screenDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
121CHAPTER 12Using PalmTM PhotosPalmTM Photos enables you to view, and manage photos on your handheld or an expansion card. Use Palm Photos to do the following:■Locate photos quickly with the Thumbnail and List views.■Organize photos into albums.■Play a slide show of your photos.■Sort photos by name or date.■View details for each photo.■Keep track of your thoughts about a photo by entering notes.■Exchange photos with other devices that use infrared or e-mail communication. ■Use Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology to transfer photos to your handheld, to copy and paste photos into popular computer applications, and to send photos as e-mail attachments or to other applications. To open Palm Photos: 1. Press Home .2. Select the Photo icon . Viewing photosA record in Palm Photos is called a photo. Photos can be a file that you transfer from your computer, store on an expansion card, or receive from another device. This section covers how to view, manage, and exchange photos that are stored on your handheld or on an expansion card that is seated in the expansion slot. For information on transferring photos from your computer, see “Installing and removing applications” in Chapter 4 and the online Help in Palm Desktop software.You can use Palm Photos to view the following types of photos:■JPG files■TIFF files■BMP filesDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos122■GIF files Viewing photos in Thumbnail viewThumbnail view displays miniature versions of your photos so that you can see several photos on the screen at the same time. Use this view to browse through photos or to locate a photo when you don’t know the name of the photo.To view photos in Thumbnail view:1. Tap the Thumbnail icon . 2. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want to view.3. Tap the thumbnail of the photo you want to view.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Tap anywhere on the screen to return to Thumbnail view.Select a photo to view Album pick listThumbnail iconDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Viewing photos123Viewing photos in List viewList view displays a list of your photos so that you can see the names and dates associated with your photos. Use this view to locate a photo when you know the name or the date the photo was created.To view photos in List view:1. Tap the List icon . 2. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want to view.3. Tap the name of the photo you want to view.TIP You can also browse and select a photo with the navigator. See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.4. Tap anywhere on the screen to return to List view.Viewing a slide showA slide show is a sequential presentation of each of the photos in the current album. You can set the length of time each photo remains on the screen in the Preferences dialog box. Select a photo to view Album pick listList iconTap and drag divider to resize columnsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos124To view a slide show:1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want to view.2. Tap Slide Show.To adjust the delay between photos during a slide show:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.3. Tap the pick list and select the delay interval: 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 1 minute.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Rotating photosIf a photo appears in the wrong orientation, you can rotate the photo.To rotate and photo:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select Rotate.Tap Slide Show Tap Slide ShowAlbum pick listAlbum pick listDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Viewing photos1253. Tap the photo you want to rotate.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Select the new orientation.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Viewing photo informationThe Photo Details dialog box enables you to view information about a photo and to change the photo name, assign it to an album, add a note about the photo, and delete a photo.To review photo information:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select Details.3. Tap the photo for which you want to view information.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Review or edit the information.5. Press Function + Enter twice, or tap Done twice.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos126Organizing photosThere are several ways you can organize your photos. You can sort photos in the List view, file photos in albums, and copy photos to an expansion cardSorting photos in List viewIn List view you can sort photos in ascending or descending order by name or date. To sort photos in List view:1. Tap a column heading to sort the photos based on that item.2. Tap the column heading to sort the photos in reverse order.Creating an albumThe process for creating a new photo album is identical to creating a new category in your other handheld applications.To create an album:1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.2. Select Edit Albums.3. Tap New.4. Enter a title for the album.Tap here to sort by dateTap here to sort by nameTap NewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Organizing photos1275. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Filing photos in albumsYou can organize the photos on your handheld by filing them into different albums. Since each expansion card is viewed as it’s own album, you cannot file photos stored on an expansion card in albums.To file photos in albums:1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album to which you want to add photos.2. Tap Organize.Plus signs appear next to the photos that are part of the selected album.3. Tap any photos you want to add to the current album.A plus sign appears next to photos you select.4. Tap any photos you want to remove from the current album.The plus sign next to the selected photos disappear.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap OrganizeDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos128Copying and Moving photosThe Copy command enables you to make a copy of a photo on your handheld or an expansion card. If the photo is currently located on your handheld it is copied to an expansion card, and vice-a-versa. The Move command transfers the photo from your handheld to an expansion card or vice-a-versa. To copy or move photos:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select the appropriate Copy or Move command.3. Tap the photo(s) you want to copy.A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Tap Copy, or Tap Move.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Renaming or deleting an albumYou can rename or delete any of the albums that you create. You cannot rename or delete the Camera album or the Unfiled Album. For information about renaming an expansion card, see “Renaming a card” in Chapter 7.When you delete an album you delete all the photos in that album are reassigned to the Unfiled album.Tap CopyDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Organizing photos129To rename an album:1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.2. Select Edit Albums.3. Select the album you want to rename. 4. Tap Rename.5. Enter the new name.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.To delete an album:1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.2. Select Edit Albums.3. Select the album you want to delete. 4. When the confirmation dialog box appears, tap Delete.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap RenameTap DeleteDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos130Beaming photosThe Beam command enables you to beam photos to other devices that are enabled with infrared technology. To beam photos:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select Beam.3. Tap the photo(s) you want to beam.A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Tap Beam.5. Point the IR port on your handheld at the IR port on the receiving device. See “Beaming data” in Chapter 3 for additional information on beaming data.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Sending photosQuery: How are the photos going to be send in Montana?The Send command enables you to send photos to other devices.Tap BeamDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Sending photos131To send photos:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select Send.3. Tap the photo(s) you want to send.A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Tap Send.5. If the Send With dialog box appears, select the transport method you want to use, and then tap OK.6. Enter the recipient’s GSM mobile phone number. TIP You can also tap To to select from a list of recent recipients, or tap Lookup to select a number from your Address Book.7. Tap Send.8. Wait for the Send Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue working on your handheld.9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap SendDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos132Deleting photosIf you no longer want a photo on your handheld or expansion card, you can delete the photo. Photos that were stored on your handheld and were synchronized with the Desktop software will be removed from Palm Photos on your computer the next time you perform a HotSync operation. If you want to keep a copy of a photo, make a copy of the photo in another folder on your computer before you perform the next HotSync operation. NOTE Photos that are stored on an expansion card are not backed-up during HotSync operations. To transfer or back up a photo from an expansion card you must use a card reader that is attached to your computer.To delete photos:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Photo, and then select Delete.3. Tap the photo(s) you want to delete.An X sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.4. Tap Delete.5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, tap Delete.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap DeleteDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Working with photos on your computer133Working with photos on your computerAfter you take and manage photos on your handheld and perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the following on your Windows computer. See the Palm Desktop software online help for details. This feature is not available on Mac computers.■View photos in various formats: List, Thumbnails, Details, and Handheld preview.■Drag photos onto the Palm Quick Install icon or the Palm Photos desktop window to install them on your handheld or an expansion card during the next HotSync operation.■Modify and delete your photos.■Organize your photos and add notes.■Transfer photos to other applications using the Send command or Export command, and import data in popular file formats.Using Palm Photos menusPalm Photos menus are shown here for your reference, and Palm Photos features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.The menus are the same when you’re viewing the Palm Photos list and an individual photo. Photo menuOptions menusNeed screenshotAbout Photos Shows version information for Palm Photos.Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos134DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
135CHAPTER 13Using To Do ListTo Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things that you have to do. Use To Do List for the following:■Make a quick and convenient list of things to do.■Assign a priority level to each task.■Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do List items. ■Assign To Do List items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.■Sort your To Do List items by due date, priority level, or category.■Attach notes to individual To Do List items for a description or clarification of the task.To open To Do List: 1. Press Home . 2. Tap the To Do icon . DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List136Creating list itemsA To Do List item is a reminder of some task that you have to complete. A record in To Do List is called an item.To create a To Do List item:1. Do one of the following:–Tap New.– If no To Do List item is currently selected, begin typing.2. Enter the text of the To Do List item. The text can be longer than one line.3. Tap anywhere onscreen to deselect the To Do List item.Setting priorityYou can use priority setting for items to arrange the tasks in your To Do List according to their importance or urgency. The default setting for the To Do List is to arrange items by priority and due date, with priority 1 items at the top. If you have a number of items in your list, changing an item’s priority setting may move its position in the list. When you create a new To Do List item, its priority is automatically set to level 1, the highest (most important) level. If you select another item first, however, the item you create appears beneath the selected item and is given the same priority as the selected item. Tap NewNew To Do itemDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Checking off a To Do List item137To set the priority of a To Do List item:1. Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do List item.2. Select the Priority number that you want to set (1 is most important). Checking off a To Do List itemYou can check off a To Do List item to indicate that you’ve completed it. You can set the To Do List to record the date that you complete the To Do item, and you can choose to show or hide completed items. See “Setting To Do Preferences” later in this chapter.To check off a To Do List item:■Tap the check box on the left side of the item.TIP You can also highlight the item you want to check off, and then press Select on the navigator.Select priorityTap hereCompleted To Do itemDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List138Changing To Do List item detailsThe To Do Item Details dialog box enables you to change settings for individual items. To display the To Do Item Details dialog box:1. Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change.TIP You can also select an item with the navigator.2. Tap Details.Setting a due dateYou can associate a due date with any To Do List item. You can also sort the items that appear in the list based on their due dates.To set a due date for a To Do List item:1. In the Details dialog box, tap No Date to open the Due Date pick list.2. Tap the date that you want to assign the item:Today Assigns the current date.Tomorrow Assigns tomorrow’s date.One week later Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date.No Date Removes the due date from the item.Choose date Opens the date selector, where you can choose any date that you want for the item.Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting To Do Preferences1393. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options dialog box, you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do List to open the pick list shown in step 2. Setting To Do PreferencesThe To Do Preferences dialog box enables you to control the appearance of To Do List and of To Do items in the Date Book Agenda view.To change the Preferences settings:1. In To Do List, tap Show.2. Select any of the following settings:Show Completed Items Displays your completed items in the To Do List. If you turn off this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when you complete (check) them.Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off this setting have not been deleted. They are still in the memory of your handheld. Purge completed items to remove them from memory.Show Only Due Items Shows only the items that are currently due, are past due, or have no due date specified. When this setting is active, items that are not yet due do not appear in the list until their due dates.Record Completion Date Replaces the due date with the actual date when you complete (check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to an item, the completion date still records when you complete the item.Show Due Dates Displays the due dates associated with items in the To Do List and displays an exclamation mark next to items that remain incomplete after the due date passes.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List1403. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Using To Do List menusTo Do List menus are shown here for your reference, and To Do List features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.Record menuOptions menuShow Priorities Shows the priority setting for each item.Show Categories Shows the category for each item.Send Item Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected item to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device. The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld.About To Do List Shows version information for To Do List. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
141CHAPTER 14Using Palm™ VersaMail™PersonalE-mailSoftwareWith the VersaMail application, you can send, receive, and manage e-mail on your handheld. This chapter describes how to set up different types of e-mail accounts and explains how to use the many e-mail features in the VersaMail application. The VersaMail application version 2.5 is the newest offering in the line of Palm personal e-mail software applications. Formerly known as MultiMail® software, version 2.5 of the VersaMail application contains new features that make sending and receiving e-mail messages and managing e-mail accounts easier than ever. What’s newKey features of the VersaMail 2.5 application include the following:■Support for both the Tungsten C navigator and keyboard, simplifying data entry and navigation■Support for the built-in 802.11b radio in your handheld, enabling wireless e-mail connectivity■Enhanced use of color, fonts, styles, and user-selected display options■Basic HTML formatting display for e-mail messages received in HTML format■Increased number of file types supported for sending and receiving as attachments■Scheduled retrieval of new e-mail, with notification■Improved message addressing capabilities■Enhanced security for sending and retrieving messagesGetting started with the VersaMail applicationThe VersaMail application is built into your handheld and does not need to be installed. To start using the application, simply press the VersaMail button on your handheld.If you are using a Windows computer, the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit installs automatically when you install the Palm Desktop software. See DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software142“Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop” later in this chapter for information on using the conduit.Synchronizing an existing usernameIf you plan to synchronize your Tungsten C handheld with an existing username by performing a HotSync operation, you must do so before you enter your e-mail account information in the VersaMail application. If you enter the e-mail account information first and then synchronize your handheld to an existing username, the username information overwrites the e-mail account information you entered.Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail databaseIf you have previously used a Palm personal e-mail application such as MultiMail SE or MultiMail Deluxe, or used version 2.0 of the VersaMail application, you can upgrade your e-mail database for use with the VersaMail 2.5 application.To upgrade an existing e-mail database for use with the VersaMail application:1. Perform a HotSync operation with a user profile that contains the existing e-mail database. To do so, press the HotSync button ™, and then select a profile that contains an e-mail database from the displayed list of users.2. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld.3. Tap Yes to accept the upgrade.Setting up and managing e-mail accountsWith the VersaMail application, you can access e-mail accounts from providers such as Earthlink or Yahoo. You may also access your corporate e-mail with the appropriate mail server configuration. See “Accessing corporate e-mail” later in this chapter for more information.You can add up to eight e-mail accounts on your handheld by setting up a connection to a network provider or synchronizing to a desktop e-mail application. For example, if you have a Yahoo e-mail account with POP access, you can create a new account in the VersaMail application and name that new account Yahoo, so that you can send and receive e-mail on your handheld using your Yahoo account.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts143Account and connection typesTwo types of e-mail accounts are supported:■Network: You can send and receive e-mail directly to and from your handheld by connecting with a network provider.■Synchronize Only (Windows computers only): You can download, view, and manage e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as Microsoft Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation using the cradle/cable. You can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for an account of this type.Using a network account, you can set up or access an e-mail account using any of the following connection methods:■Built-in 802.11b radio on your handheld■Palm™ Bluetooth Card (sold separately) attached through the expansion card slot connection to a mobile phone or local access point that is enabled with Bluetooth technology■PalmModem® accessory (sold separately)■External modem sled (sold separately)■Infrared (IR) port on the handheld to infrared port on a mobile phone■Direct connection to a mobile phone by means of a physical cable■Handheld cradle connected to your desktop (Windows users only)Setting up a network e-mail accountBefore you can set up a network e-mail account, you must do the following:■Establish the e-mail account with a network provider. Common network providers include Internet service providers (ISPs) such as Earthlink and Prodigy. A provider can also be a wireless GSM or GPRS carrier such as VoiceStream, Cingular, or VodaFone. ■Configure the service connection settings for this account on your handheld using your handheld’s Network Preferences and Connection Preferences screens. See Chapter 18 for more information.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software144You must also have the appropriate prerequisite for the type of connection you want to make, as follows.Using an ISPIf you are setting up a new e-mail account and have a well-known ISP such as Earthlink or Mindspring, many of the required settings during the account setup are automatically configured. For other ISPs, you need the following information:■The protocol used for incoming mail, such as POP or IMAP■The name of the incoming mail server■The name of the outgoing mail (SMTP) server■Whether your e-mail account requires any encryption, such as APOP or ESMTP■Your e-mail address and password■The login script (if any) that you need for connecting to your ISP or mail serverConnection Type PrerequisiteDial-up modem connection via built-in 802.11b radio Proximity to an 802.11b hub.High-speed GPRS Palm Bluetooth Card and mobile phone or LAN access point enabled with Bluetooth technology.Active GPRS service ordered from your wireless carrier.GSM dial-up Palm Bluetooth Card and mobile phone or LAN access point enabled with Bluetooth technology.Active wireless service with a GSM carrier. If you are using GPRS, the same carrier generally provides both GSM and GPRS service.Note that some GSM carriers require you to order a special data service (separate from voice service) to make a network connection.PalmModem accessory PalmModem accessory.External modem sled Wireless modem accessory.IR to IR phone IR-enabled mobile phone.Direct connection to a phone by means of a physical cable Connector cable and mobile phone.Handheld cradle connected to desktop Handheld cradle and cable (Windows users only).DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts145NOTE Information about your e-mail account is available from the e-mail provider. Depending on the type of e-mail service you have, you may be able to access this information by going to the e-mail provider’s web site or by contacting the provider’s customer support.Using a corporate e-mail accountIf you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail account, you create this account on your handheld in exactly the same way as any other account (see “Setting up a network e-mail account” later in this chapter), with one exception: for a corporate e-mail account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN). See the following section “VPNs” for information.With a corporate e-mail account, you can access the following types of mail servers, among others:■Microsoft Exchange■Domino■Sun iPlanetSee “Creating a network e-mail account” later in this chapter for instructions on setting up a corporate e-mail account on your handheld.VPNsIf you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your handheld. A VPN enables you to log into your corporate mail server through the company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot “break through” the firewall to gain access to the mail server.You need to set up a VPN to access corporate e-mail in either of the following two situations:■Your company’s network is located outside of the firewall■You company’s network is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home)NOTE Check with your company’s server administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network.See (X-REF) for instructions on setting up a VPN on your handheld. See “Creating a network e-mail account” later in this chapter for information on choosing your VPN connection in the VersaMail application (after you have set it up on your handheld) for sending and receiving e-mail.NOTE You cannot use push mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of e-mail with accounts that use a VPN connection. See “Push mail with notification” and “Send retry” later in this chapter for information.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software146Creating a network e-mail accountYou create a new account in Account Setup, which guides you through the process. To create a network e-mail account:1. Press Function + Menu , select Accounts, and select Account Setup.2. Tap New.3. Enter the following:If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected, it displays the correct protocol.4. Tap Next.Account Name Enter a descriptive name for the account, such as “My Yahoo.”Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed. If you set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN connection appears in the Mail Service pick list. Select this connection if you want to connect to your corporate network using the VPN. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for information.Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most e-mail providers use the POP protocol.)DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts147Entering the account username and passwordIn the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and password for this account. To enter the account username and password:1. Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.2. Tap the Password box, and then enter your password. 3. Press Function +Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.4. Tap Next.Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail serverYou need to verify your e-mail address for the account you are accessing, as well as enter the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.To enter mail server settings:1. If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen, enter the e-mail address for your account.E-mail address will be filled in automatically if you chose a preconfigured mail serviceMail servers will be filled in automatically if the VersaMail application knows the names based on the mail service you choseDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1482. Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.3. Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.4. Tap Next.5. Do one of the following:– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting, sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on getting and sending e-mail. – To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of procedures.Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP accountThe next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:1. (Optional) Select any of the following:– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all of your e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY. – To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts149– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total, including attachments.2. Tap Next. Setting outgoing mail optionsOutgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.POP accountsIMAP accountsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software150To set outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Do any of the following:2. Tap Next.Adding a signatureIf you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that it appears on each message you send. Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.”Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though the e-mail came from the address you entered.BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts151To add a personal signature:1. Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the signature. This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.2. Tap Next.Setting advanced outgoing mail optionsYou can set additional outgoing mail options.To set advanced outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Select any of the following:– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.2. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Signature lines appear only if check box is selectedUsername and Password fields appear only if ESMTP check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software152Testing your new accountAfter you finish setting up a new e-mail account, the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed. You can test whether the e-mail account is set up and working properly by tapping Get Mail. See “Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire message” later in this chapter for more information.Creating a synchronize-only accountNOTE You must be using a Windows computer to create a synchronize-only account.A synchronize-only e-mail account enables you to download, view, and manage e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as Microsoft Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation by means of the cradle/cable. You can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for any account of this type.To create a synchronize-only e-mail account:1. Press Function + Menu , select Accounts, and then select Account Setup.2. Tap New.3. Do the following:Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My Yahoo.”Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed. If you set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN connection appears in the Mail Service pick list. Select this connection if you want to connect to your corporate network using the VPN. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for information.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts153If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected, it displays the correct protocol.4. On the same screen, select the Synchronize Only Account check box.5. Tap Next.Entering the account username and passwordIn the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and password for this account. To enter the account username and password:1. Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail providers use the POP protocol.)Select check box for a synchronize-only accountDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1542. Tap the Password box, and then enter your password. 3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.4. Tap Next.Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail serverYou need to enter your e-mail address for the account you are accessing as well as the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.To enter mail server settings:1. If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen, enter the e-mail address for your account.2. Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.3. Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.4. Tap Next.5. Do one of the following:– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap Done. After you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you need to configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account in HotSync Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be able to synchronize e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until you configure the account on your desktop.E-mail address will be filled in automatically if you chose a preconfigured mail serviceMail servers will be filled in automatically if the VersaMail application knows the names based on the mail service you choseDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts155– To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of procedures.Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP accountThe next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:1. (Optional) Select any of the following:– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all your e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY. – To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box.– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total, including attachments.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1562. Tap Next. Setting outgoing mail optionsOutgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.To set outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Enter or select any of the following:2. Tap Next.Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.”Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from “me@yahoo.com” but you want recipients to reply to “me@earthlink.net,” enter the reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though the e-mail came from the address you entered.BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.POP accountsIMAP accountsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts157Adding a signatureIf you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that it appears on each message you send. To add a personal signature:1. Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the signature. This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Setting advanced outgoing mail optionsYou can set additional outgoing mail options.To set advanced outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Select any of the following:– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.Signature lines appear only if check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1582. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Configuring your synchronize-only accountAfter you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you need to configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account in HotSync Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be able to synchronize e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until you configure the account on your desktop. Setting VersaMail connection preferencesYou can set connection preferences for your e-mail accounts. These preferences apply to all accounts you have set up in the VersaMail application.To set account connection preferences:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Select Preferences. 4. Tap Advanced.Username and Password fields appear only if ESMTP check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts1595. Select any of the following preferences:Editing e-mail accountsFrom time to time, you may need to edit information about one of the e-mail accounts you set up. To select the account to edit:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Accounts.3. Select Account Setup.Enable Smart Addressing Types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. See the procedure for creating new e-mail later in this chapter for more information. Auto-Empty Mail from Trash Determines how often e-mail messages in the trash are automatically deleted. See “Emptying the trash” later in this chapter for more information. Timeout Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing out. If you are using an adapter with a mobile phone, this value should be greater than 45 seconds. To change, tap the Timeout field and enter a new value.Auto-Disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command. Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP. This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple e-mail transactions in a short amount of time. Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave the VersaMail application. This feature is an alternative to Auto-Disconnect. This option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail application, but automatically disconnects when you move on to a different application on your handheld. If this option is not selected, you must manually disconnect from your ISP. Modem Wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem uses to initialize itself. If you have a modem, tap and enter a number of seconds for the wait. The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3, and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1604. Tap the name of the account to edit, and then tap Edit.To edit an account:1. On the Account Setup screen, change any of the following:If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected, it displays the correct protocol.2. Tap Next.Changing the account username and passwordIn the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you can change the username and/or password for this account. Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My Yahoo.”Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed. If you set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN connection appears in the Mail Service pick list. Select this connection if you want to connect to your corporate network using the VPN. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for information.Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail providers use the POP protocol.)DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts161To edit the account username and password:1. (Optional) Enter a new username for accessing your e-mail. This is generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.2. (Optional) Tap the Password box, and then enter a new password. The Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.4. Tap Next.Editing the name of the outgoing and incoming mail serverIf your e-mail address or the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers has changed or has been entered incorrectly, you can edit the address or server name.To edit mail server settings:1. (Optional) Enter a new e-mail address for the account you are accessing, such as “examplename@yahoo.com.”2. (Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1623. (Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.4. Tap Next.5. Do one of the following:– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting, sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on getting and sending e-mail. – To edit additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of procedures.Editing mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP accountThe next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.To edit mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:1. (Optional) Change any of the following:– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all your e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY. – To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box.– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts163– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total, including attachments.2. Tap Next. Editing outgoing mail optionsOutgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.To edit outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Change any of the following:Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.”Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though the e-mail came from the address you entered.POP accountsIMAP accountsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1642. Tap Next.Editing a signatureIf you added a signature to the e-mail messages you send, you can edit the signature. For example, you can change your name or the telephone number that appears in each message you send. To edit a personal signature:1. (Optional) To add a signature, select the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the signature. To edit existing an signature name, phone number, and so on, edit the information on the signature lines.To remove a signature, deselect the Attach Signature to messages check box.This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.2. Tap Next.BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter that e-mail address. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts165Editing advanced outgoing mail optionsYou can change additional outgoing mail options.To edit advanced outgoing mail options:1. (Optional) Change any of the following:– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See later in this chapter for information on SSL.– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Deleting an e-mail accountWhen you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed from your handheld. The account still exists on the server. For example, deleting your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes only the account from your handheld. Your e-mail account still exists at Yahoo.com. To delete an account:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Accounts.Username and Password fields appear only if ESMTP check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1663. Select Account Setup.4. Tap the name of the account you want to delete, and then tap Delete.5. Tap Yes in the Delete Confirmation dialog box to delete the account and all associated e-mail messages.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.After you perform the next HotSync operation, the memory associated with an account and its messages is released. Selecting a different service for a given e-mail accountWhen you set up connections on your handheld (in the Connection Preferences screen), you pair each connection with a network service (in the Network Preferences screen) and then select one of these services to be the default for all network activity (sending and receiving e-mail, surfing the Web, and so on) on your handheld. By default, the VersaMail application uses this default service for sending and receiving messages for all e-mail accounts you set up. See (X-REF) for information on setting up the default service for your handheld.However, for any given e-mail account, you have the option of switching to a different service for use with that account only. For example, the default service you have selected for your handheld may be called My VPN and use your handheld’s built-in 802.11b radio to make a dial-up connection to your corporate mail server. You may also have set up an e-mail account called My Earthlink, which runs on the My VPN connection by default. However, if you travel into an area that DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts167has GPRS coverage, you may want to switch your My Earthlink account to the service called Earthlink GPRS, which connects to a GPRS service using a Palm Bluetooth Card (sold separately) inserted into your handheld’s expansion card slot.To set up a service for a given e-mail account (different from the default service for your handheld):1. From the Inbox of the account you want to switch, tap Get Mail.2. Tap Details.3. Tap the Always connect using check box. A pick list of available services appears. The currently used connection is displayed by default.4. Select the connection you want to switch to from the Service pick list.SHOWTap to change the service connection for this e-mail account only from your default handheld service connectionSelect a new service connection for this e-mail account onlyPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1685. Press Function + Enter (alternately, tap OK), and then press Function + Enter (or tap OK) again. If there is an existing service connection, it is disconnected and the new connection is initiated. The VersaMail application sends and checks for any new e-mail using the new connection.When you exit the VersaMail application, the new service disconnects. When you reopen the application, the e-mail account you selected (My Earthlink in this example) continues to connect using the new connection (Earthlink GPRS in this example) until you either select a new service or deselect the Always connect using check box. If you deselect the Always connect using check box, the e-mail account (My Earthlink) connects using the default handheld service (My VPN in this example).The Always connect using check box changes the connection service for the selected e-mail account only. You must follow the preceding procedure for each e-mail account whose connection you want to switch from the default connection on your handheld.Getting, sending, and managing e-mailGetting and sending e-mail on your handheld is easy and helps you keep your business and personal life organized. You can get and send e-mail by simply tapping one button on the handheld. You can manage the messages in your e-mail accounts by moving messages between folders, deleting old e-mail messages individually or in groups, and marking messages as read or unread. This section describes how to do the following:■Get and send e-mail for your e-mail accounts■View and send e-mail attachments, such as text or Microsoft Word documents, wirelesslyGetting and reading e-mailYou can get e-mail subjects only—the message size, author, and subject—or you can get entire messages immediately. If you choose to get message subjects only and want to read a full message, you can get more of the message. Choosing the e-mail account and displaying the InboxTo view the e-mail in an account, you must switch to that account and then get the e-mail. For example, if you want to collect and view the e-mail from your Yahoo account, you switch to the account created to retrieve e-mail from your Yahoo account. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail169To display an account and its Inbox:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Accounts.3. Press Command + the number of the account you want from the list.Alternately, tap the name of the account. TIP You can also press the VersaMail button repeatedly to scroll through the accounts you have configured in the VersaMail application until you get to the account you want.4. Tap the folders pick list, and tap Inbox if the Inbox is not displayed.Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire messageWhen you get e-mail messages, you can choose to get the subject only or to get the entire message. You can also use the Details dialog box to select options for getting unread e-mail only, downloading attachments, using filters, and more. To get e-mail messages:1. Tap Get Mail.If you have e-mail stored in your Outbox, tap Get & Send.2. In the Get Mail dialog box, tap Subjects Only to download subjects only, or tap Messages to download entire messages.TIP You can turn off the Get Mail dialog box in VersaMail Preferences. See “Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail” later in this chapter.SHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1703. (Optional) Tap Details and select options for retrieving unread e-mail, downloading attachments, using filters, auto-disconnect, maximum download size, and default connection type for this account. Tap OK.NOTE See “Creating mail filters” later in this chapter for more information about filters. See “Setting VersaMail connection preferences” earlier in this chapter for information on the auto-disconnect feature. See “Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for information on setting a default connection type. NOTE The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default. 4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.5. (Optional) If you are retrieving mail using a VPN connection, you may be asked to enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN. If so, enter the username and password. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for more information.6. The Getting Messages dialog box shows updates as your e-mail is downloaded.When the Getting Messages dialog box disappears, another dialog box appears and displays the number of new e-mail messages.Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail171A list of your e-mail appears in the Inbox.Push mail with notificationThe VersaMail application features push e-mail. E-mail messages received into a given e-mail account are pushed to your handheld, so that they are ready for you to read them. Your handheld notifies you of new messages by blinking an indicator light, beeping, or vibrating. The handheld also displays a visual list of notifications, called the Attention Manager.Receiving e-mail notificationWhen a new message arrives in your account, by default your handheld beeps and notifies you of the new e-mail’s arrival. The beep or alert sound your hear is called a notification. Your handheld also notifies you of a new message’s arrival by blinking an indicator light or vibrating if the right preferences are turned on. For more information, see “Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail” later in this chapter. NOTE The Notification option is turned on by default. If the handheld does not notify you when new messages are received, check whether the Notification option is turned on. See “Setting notification options” later in this chapter for more information.Viewing and using the Attention ManagerThe handheld also displays an Attention Manager that shows summary information about new e-mail messages and alerts from other applications, such as alerts to remind you of Date Book appointments.Envelope icons indicate whether a message or subject has been downloaded, and whether there are any attachmentsShows unread/total messagesDisplays the time for messages received today and the date for all other messagesFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software172To view the Attention Manager:■Tap the blinking asterisk in the upper-left corner of any screen.If you are using the VersaMail application and you receive new e-mail messages, they filter into the Inbox. As you work with e-mail messages in the Inbox, the Attention Manager doesn’t display a reminder for any new messages that arrive because the messages are already displayed in the Inbox. NOTE A broken envelope icon appears next to a message when an e-mail was not successfully downloaded. To retrieve the e-mail, you can either tap the reminder in the Attention Manager or tap Get Mail in the VersaMail application. To respond to the reminders, do one of the following:■Tap the check box to clear a reminder from the list.NOTE Clearing a reminder only removes it from the Attention Manager. It does not delete the message from the VersaMail application.■Tap the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to open and read the e-mail message in the appropriate account’s Inbox. ■Tap Done to close the Attention Manager and return to whatever you were doing on your handheld before the Attention Manager appeared. ■Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes.■Tap Clear All to dismiss all reminders in the Attention Manager. Setting notification optionsYou can turn the notification sound on or off to determine which messages trigger an alert. To set notification options:1. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld.2. Tap the Menu icon .3. Tap Options.4. Tap Notification.Tap the check box to remove a single reminder from the listThe mail icon tells you that this reminder is for an e-mail messageTap the text to open the e-mail messageDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail1735. Tap the Notify me of new mail and mail alerts check box. 6. Tap OK. Changing the notification soundYou can choose from a variety of sounds, such as birds, bumble bees, or simply an alarm, to notify you when new e-mail is received. 1. Tap the Menu icon .2. Tap Options.3. Tap Notification.4. Tap the Notify Sound pick list and select a sound. The handheld plays a brief demonstration of the sound. With the sound turned off, the indicator light goes on or the handheld vibrates if you selected one of those options (see the next section). 5. Tap OK. Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail You can select how your handheld notifies you of new e-mail by setting the Alarm preferences. These preferences are set in your handheld’s General preferences. To make your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail:1. Tap the Home icon .2. Tap the Preferences icon .FS9DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1743. Tap the Preferences pick list in the upper-right corner, and then tap General. 4. Do either or both of the following:– To change the volume of the Alarm Sound, tap the Alarm Sound pick list, and then tap Low, Medium, High, or Off. – To change whether or not the handheld vibrates when you receive new e-mail, tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list, and then tap On or Off. 5. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld. Creating a notification filter for e-mail you receive You can create and use a notification filter to limit the e-mail messages that trigger an alert from your handheld. The notification filter doesn’t filter the e-mail messages themselves, just the notification—all messages are still delivered.For example, when you travel you may want to be alerted only to e-mail regarding a specific project. You can create a notification filter that alerts you when e-mail that meets these conditions arrives.NOTE Although the notification filter alerts you when e-mail that meets the filter criteria arrives, all other e-mail messages are also received. You don’t receive a notification for other messages, however. If you want to receive only specific e-mail messages, you can create mail filters. See “Creating mail filters” for more information. To create or edit a notification filter:1. Tap the Menu icon .2. Tap Options.3. Tap Notification. 4. Tap Filter.5. Tap Edit.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail1756. Use the pick lists to create criteria for the notification filter.The two pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement that identifies the type of e-mail that triggers notification. For example, a filter might read, “If the [From] [Contains] mweston@example.com, Then Notify Me.” You can also use the And button to create a more complex statement, such as “If the [From] [Contains] mweston@example.com, And if the [Subject] [Starts with] Apollo Project, Then Notify Me.”When you use this notification filter, only e-mail matching these conditions prompts a notification alert on your handheld.7. Tap OK. Scheduled retrieval of e-mailYou can set up the VersaMail application to automatically search for new mail on a regular schedule for a given e-mail account. When setting up a schedule, you select the interval for retrieving mail, the start and end time for retrieving mail, and the days on which scheduled e-mail retrieval should take place.You can set up different schedules for each of your e-mail accounts, but you can only set up one schedule for a given account. For example, if you set up a schedule for mail retrieval on weekdays for your Yahoo account, you cannot set up a separate schedule for weekends on the same account.To Select the header field with the information contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject.Contains Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does not contain.Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For example, if you want to be notified only of e-mail where the Subject is the Apollo Project, enter “Apollo Project.”Add Use to further refine the notification criteria by linking two conditions together. Tap Add, and then select criteria from the To and Contains pick lists. Enter the text that must be found in the header field in the Edit line. Tap to remove the current notification filterSet the filter criteriaDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software176Scheduled retrieval of e-mail downloads the first 3KB of each message. If a message is larger than 3KB, tap the More button on the message screen to download and view the entire message.Scheduled retrieval of e-mail recognizes any filter criteria you have set up for downloading messages to your handheld. See “Managing mail filters” later in this chapter for information. Any messages that do not meet the filter criteria will not be downloaded during scheduled e-mail retrieval. To retrieve messages that do not conform to filter criteria, perform a manual Get with all filters turned off.If a message is downloaded during scheduled e-mail retrieval but is not deleted from the mail server, the message will not be downloaded again for a 30-day period. If, after 30 days, the message is still on the mail server, it will be downloaded during the next scheduled e-mail retrieval. However, messages remaining on the mail server after a scheduled e-mail retrieval will be downloaded to the handheld during a manual Get.If scheduled e-mail retrieval is taking place and you turn your handheld off or the network connection is disconnected, the retrieval fails. If you are attempting a scheduled retrieval over an 802.11b network, you must be in range of an 802.11b hub for scheduled retrieval to work.If more than one scheduled retrieval of e-mail takes place at the same time (for example, for two different e-mail accounts), the retrievals take place in the following order:■Any past-due retrieval (for example, a retry of an earlier failed retrieval)■Current retrievals in order according to the order or e-mail accounts (#1, #2, and so on)NOTE Scheduled retrieval of e-mail is not supported for VPN or SSL connections. It is also not supported if you have configured TealLock to encrypt databases on your handheld. If you try to set up scheduled e-mail retrieval for a non-supported connection type, an error message appears.Scheduled mail retrieval notificationsIf scheduled retrieval of e-mail takes place over an 802.11b network using the built-in 802.11b radio on your handheld, you will not see any status messages during retrieval. If scheduled mail retrieval takes place over any other type of connection (for example, using a Palm Bluetooth Card inserted into your handheld’s card expansion slot), a series of status messages appears during the connection and mail retrieval process.FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail177If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers and downloads new messages for a given e-mail account, a notification appears in the Attention Manager displaying the account name and the number of new messages. If retrieval is scheduled for more than one account, a separate notification appears for each account.Tap the notification to go to the Inbox of that account, or launch the VersaMail application and go to that account. Once you view a message in the Inbox it is removed from the Attention Manager notification, even if you do not open the message. Scheduled retrieval then starts at the next scheduled interval with the Attention Manager counter reset to 1. If you do not view the Inbox of the selected account and another scheduled e-mail retrieval takes place and finds new messages, the Attention Manager will add the number of new messages to the notification for that account. For example, if schedule retrieval #1 finds two new messages and, before you view the Inbox, scheduled retrieval #2 takes place and finds three more new messages, the Attention Manager notification indicates five new messages for that account.If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers new messages but then fails for any reason, a notification appears in the Attention Manager displaying the account name and an error message.You can tap the error message or open the VersaMail application to the given account for more detailed information on the failed schedule retrieval.FLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software178If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers no new messages for a given account, no notifications appear in the Attention Manager for that account.The Attention Manager displays only the most recent notification for a given account. For example, if one scheduled retrieval of messages failed, but the next one succeeded and downloaded two new messages, the Attention Manager would first display the error message, but would display the number of messages retrieved after the successful retrieval.Attention Manager notifications are specific for each account. For example, if schedule retrieval fails for one account but succeeds in downloading new messages for a different account, the Attention Manager displays an error message for the first account and a message indicating the number of messages downloaded for the second account.To set up scheduled retrieval of e-mail messages:1. On the message screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Select Auto Get MailFLOWNEW SCREENFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail1794. Select the Get mail automatically check box.5. Set schedule options:6. Tap OK.7. (Optional) Tap Get Mail or HotSync. You should perform a manual Get Mail or HotSync operation after setting up scheduled retrieval of e-mail. This ensures that only new messages will be retrieved during scheduled e-mail retrieval.Scheduled e-mail retrieval retriesIf the interval for scheduled retrieval of e-mail is set at “Every 1 hour” or less frequently, and a scheduled retrieval fails for any reason, the VersaMail application will continue attempting to retrieve e-mail at 30-minute intervals until either the next scheduled retrieval of e-mail occurs or the end time for scheduled e-mail Interval Tap the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 15 minutes to 12 hours. See “Cost issues with scheduled e-mail retrieval” for information on setting the interval.Start Time Tap the Start Time box, tap to enter the start time hour and minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Tap OK.End Time Tap the End Time box, tap to enter the end time hour and minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Tap OK.Days Tap days schedule will be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can only set up one schedule per a given e-mail account.FLOWFLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software180retrieval is reached. If the interval is set for more frequently than one hour and a scheduled e-mail retrieval fails, the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled retrieval of e-mail.Cost issues with scheduled e-mail retrievalIf your network provider charges a service fee, using scheduled retrieval of e-mail can substantially add to your monthly charges. This issue is especially noticeable for POP accounts, because the size of the IDs used to locate POP account messages is much larger (and thus takes longer to read) than for IMAP accounts. To minimize monthly charges, set your interval for scheduled e-mail retrieval to no more frequently than once per hour. If you set the interval as more frequently than once per hour, an alert message appears.Inbox icons in the VersaMail applicationThe icons to the left of a message in the Inbox indicate the message’s status.Reading e-mailTo read e-mail, tap the e-mail message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located.Alternately, you can use the navigator for one-hand message viewing.Only the subject header information is downloaded.Only the subject header and attachment information are downloaded. Part or all of the message text is downloaded.Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded.FLOWTap to readFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail181To read a message using the navigator:1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read.2. Press Select to select the message, and then press Select again to open the message.3. After reading the message, press Select to close the message.If you chose to get messages by subjects only, tap the More button to view the body of the e-mail message, plus any attachments. See “Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire message” earlier in this chapter.If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the e-mail message is displayed. However, if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only a partial message is displayed. Tap the More button to view the entire message.Plain text and HTML e-mailBy default, the VersaMail application is set to receive mail in HTML format. This means that any e-mail messages sent as HTML will be displayed on your handheld with basic HTML formatting intact, including the following:■Boldface■Italics■Underlining■Colored words■Bullet lists■Numbered lists■Line breaksFormatting not displayed (for example, certain types of graphics) is received as an attachment that can be downloaded and viewed.When you set the VersaMail application to receive e-mail messages as HTML, any messages sent as plain text will be displayed as plain text only. You can also set the application to receive all messages as plain text only, regardless of the format in which they were sent. If you choose this option, only the text of any messages sent in HTML format will be displayed. See “Setting preferences for getting and Tap More to view the entire messageMOREDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software182deleting e-mail” later in this chapter for instructions on choosing to receive e-mail in HTML or plain text format.NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally sent as HTML.Viewing other foldersWhen you get new e-mail, it appears in the account’s Inbox folder. You can move an e-mail message from one folder to another and then view it in the destination folder. To view other folders:1. Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.2. Tap the folder you want to view.Managing display options in the folder’s list viewYou can customize the way in which messages appear in the list view of your mail folders. The options you choose apply to all folders.The display options you can customize, and the default settings, are as follows:Option DefaultSort by DateSort order DescendingSummary view Two-line viewSummary view columns Sender, Date, SubjectFont Palm 9Unread message color BlackRead message color BlackAvailable foldersSHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail183To change the sort order:1. Tap Display.2. Tap the Sort by pick list, and then tap the column name. 3. Tap Descend or Ascend to change the sort order. To select a one-line or two-line view:1. Tap Display2. Tap the Show pick list, and then tap the view you want.To display or hide a column in a folder’s list view:1. Tap Display.2. Tap the check box for each column that you want to show. The column options will change depending on whether you choose a one-line or a two-line view.NOTE If you select Date, the Date column displays the message time for any messages received today—that is, any message received after 12:01 A.M. Otherwise, the Date column shows the date the message was received. FLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software184To change the font:1. Tap Display.2. Tap the font pick list, and then tap the font you want. To select colors for read and unread mail:1. Tap Display.2. Tap the Unread pick list, and then tap the color you want to use to display unread messages.3. Tap the Read pick list, and then the color you want to use to display read messages.In the list view itself, you can also change the size of the columns.FLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail185To change the size of a column in the folder’s list view:NOTE Changing column size is available for one-line message view only.1. Tap and hold the stylus on the column divider.2. Drag the column divider to change the width of the column.You can also change the font within an individual message. This change affects the selected message only.To change the font of a message:1. On the message screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Tap Font4. Tap the Message Font pick list and select the font you want.Drag the column divider left or right to make the column narrower or widerFLOWNEW SCREENFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software186Moving e-mail between foldersYou can move one or more e-mail messages between folders. To move one e-mail message:1. Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. Press Up or Down to move to the folder you want, and the press Select to select the folder.Alternately, tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then tap the folder name.2. Tap the icon to the left of the message, press Right on the navigator to open the Message menu, press Down to move to the Move To option, and then press Select to select this option.Alternately, tap the icon to the left of the message, and then tap Move To from the pop-up menu.The folders pick list appears. 3. Press Up or Down on the navigator to move to the folder you want, and then press Select to select the folder.SHOWSHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail187Alternately, tap the folder that you want.TIP You can also move a single e-mail message from within the body of the message by pressing Command , tapping the folder icon, and selecting the destination folder from the pick list. See “Using the command bar” later in this chapter for more information on the command bar.To move multiple e-mail messages:1. Tap the folder that contains the e-mail messages you want to move.2. Select the messages by tapping to the left of each message icon.TIP To select a group of adjacent messages, drag the stylus to the left of the message icons. A checkmark appears next to the selected messages.SHOWSHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software1883. Do one of the following:– Press Command + V (alternately, press Function + Menu ), and then select Move To on the Message menu.– Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then tap Move To on the pick list.4. Tap the folders pick list, and select a destination folder.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Creating and editing mail foldersYou can also create new folders so that you can store e-mail messages by subject, person, or project. The VersaMail application has certain existing folders, such as Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, and Trash. The procedure for creating and editing folders varies slightly between POP and IMAP e-mail accounts, as described in the following procedure.SHOWSHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail189To create and edit e-mail folders:1. Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then tap Edit Folders.2. On the Edit Folders or Edit IMAP Folders screen, select any of the following:– To create a new folder, tap New, and then enter the new folder name. For IMAP accounts only, select the check box if you also want to create the folder on the server. When finished, press Function + Enter , or tap OK. – To rename a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, tap Rename, and then enter the new folder name. For IMAP accounts only, you have the option of deleting the folder on the server. Select the check box if you also want to rename the folder on the server. When finished, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.POP accountsIMAP accountsPOP accountsIMAP accountsPOP accountsIMAP accountsPOP accountsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software190– To delete a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, and then tap Delete. For IMAP accounts only, you have the option of deleting the folder on the server. Select the check box if you also want to delete the folder on the server, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK. For POP accounts, the folder will be deleted immediately and you will not see a confirmation screen.Creating and sending new e-mailWhen you create a new e-mail message, you can enter the person’s e-mail address or use the Lookup screen to find a particular address. To create a new e-mail message:1. Press Command + N.Alternately, tap New.2. Enter the recipient’s name using one of the methods described in the next procedures.NOTE When you address a message to several recipients, you do not see all the recipients on the To list because the list is truncated on the To line. If you tap the To field, a dialog box shows all recipients for the current message.Delete confirmation appears for IMAP accounts onlySHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail191Addressing a message by typing the addressYou can address a message by entering the complete address.To enter the address:1. In the New Message screen, tap or navigate to the To field and enter the address, and then tap Done. For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient names. The To field will expand to two lines during address entry for addresses longer than the one-line display. After address entry, addresses longer than one line will be shown on a single line followed by an ellipsis.Alternately, in the New Message screen, tap the word To and enter the address on the Recipient List screen, and then tap Done. Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry.FLOWFLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software192For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) or tap the semicolon button at the bottom of the screen, and then type a space between recipient names.NOTE If you enter a comma instead of a semicolon, it is automatically changed to a semicolon. If you enter a space with no punctuation between names, semicolons are not inserted and the e-mail message is improperly addressed.If you want to edit an e-mail address that is longer than the line provided in the New Message screen, tap the To field and edit the address. 2. To send copies, tap cc: or bcc: and enter the recipient’s address. Copies (cc:) allow recipients to see the addresses of the other recipients, but addresses in the blind copies (bcc:) field are hidden from all other recipients. TIP To automatically fill in the address as you type, see “Using Smart Addressing to address a message” later in this chapter. Addressing a message using Address BookYou can enter a recipient’s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address. The names and addresses in the Lookup screen come from Address Book. To use an address from Address Book:1. In the New Message screen, tap the word To. 2. On the Recipient List screen, tap Lookup.3. On the Address Lookup screen, tap the address you want, and then tap Add. To add multiple addresses,(QUERY: How do you make multiple selection from the Address Lookup screen?)FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail1934. Tap Add.5. To enter an address in the cc: or bcc: field, tap the field name and follow the steps given for the To field.Using Smart Addressing to address a messageSmart Addressing types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. Smart addressing automatically fills in fields when the recipient’s name and e-mail address are in your Address Book. By default, Smart Addressing is selected in VersaMail Preferences. To use Smart Addressing to address a message:1. In the New Message screen, tap the word To. 2. Start entering the person’s name, such as Joe Smith.Once the name is recognized from your Address Book, the name and e-mail address are automatically completed on the recipient list. For example, if you have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in your Address Book (and no other names starting with J), once you type “Joe,” the entry “Joe Smith” is completed with the correct e-mail address.3. If the recognized name has more than one e-mail address associated with it, all of the e-mail addresses are displayed. Navigate or tap to select the e-mail address you want.4. Tap Done.FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software194Turning Smart Addressing on or offYou can turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences. By default, Smart Addressing is turned on.To turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences:1. In the Inbox, press Command + R.Alternately, in the Inbox, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and then tap Preferences. 2. Tap Advanced.3. Tap the Enable Smart Addressing check box if it is not selected. A checkmark means it is turned on.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Composing and sending e-mailAfter you enter your recipient addresses, you can compose the rest of the e-mail message. To compose the rest of the e-mail and send it:1. Tap the Subject field and enter the subject of your e-mail.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail1952. Tap the area below the Subject line and enter the text of your e-mail. To access the editing features available on the Edit menu, press Function + Menu . The first character of each sentence is automatically capitalized for you. 3. (Optional) Press Command + A (alternately, tap the Options menu and select Add Attachments). See “Attaching files to e-mail” later in this chapter. 4. Tap one of the following to send the e-mail:TIP You can also tap Save To Drafts from the Options menu (or press Command + W) to save this message in the Drafts folder rather than sending it. Send retry(QUERY: Is background send automatic? In the 10/16 flow, there is a dialog screen stating the manual send failed, and asking the user if they want to perform background send. This contradicts the PRD/FRD, which says background send happens automatically. The sections in this doc are written according to the PRD/FRD.)When you tap Send on the message menu, the VersaMail application automatically attempts to send the message. If the send attempt fails for any reason (your handheld is out of range, the application cannot connect to the mail server), the application moves the message to the Outbox and continues to try to send the message at 30-minute intervals, for up to three attempts. You do not need to set up or do anything for automatic send retry to occur.Send Sends the e-mail immediately. (Alternately, press Command + Y.)Outbox Stores e-mail in the Outbox so you can compose e-mail offline and then send all e-mail during one connection with the server. To send your e-mail later, go to the Outbox and tap Get & Send. The connection to the mail server is truncated and all the e-mail in the Outbox is delivered.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software196If you put a message in the Outbox, you must perform a manual send to send the message on the first attempt. The VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only after a manual send attempt fails.NOTE Scheduled retrieval of e-mail is not supported for VPN or SSL connections, or for accounts for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before sending mail. It is also not supported if you have configured TealLock to encrypt databases on your handheld.Send retry notificationsIf automatic send retry fails after the third attempt, a notification appears in the Attention Manager. A separate notification appears for each e-mail account for which a send retry occurs.Tap the notification or open the account in the VersaMail application to view a detailed error message. Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Attention Manager. The Attention Manager only shows the most recent notification for a given e-mail account, no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account.NOTE If you perform a soft reset during automatic send retry, the retry cancels. You must manually send any messages in the Outbox after the soft reset.Modifying messages in the OutboxA message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited, moved, or deleted. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a manual send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, the message will be stored in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry. FLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail197During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is attempting to send is in a locked state and cannot be edited, moved, or deleted. If you try to modify a message in the locked state, an error message appears.If a send retry fails after the third attempt, the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state. You can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete the message. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a manual send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, the message will be stored in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry.See the following section “Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications” for icons that indicate messages awaiting the next automatic send retry as well as messages in the locked and error state.Outbox icons in the VersaMail applicationsThe icons to the left of a message in the Outbox indicate the message’s status.Completing draftsIf you are composing an e-mail message and you exit the VersaMail application before tapping Outbox, Send, or Cancel, the e-mail automatically moves to the Drafts folder. To finish editing the e-mail, tap the folders pick list and select Drafts. Select the e-mail you want to complete or edit, and tap Edit. You can also delete the e-mail in the Drafts folder.Attaching a personal signatureYou can include a personal signature, such as your name, e-mail address, and telephone number, with each e-mail you send. NEW ICON Message has been placed in the Outbox by the user and must be manually sent.NEW ICON Manual send failed; message has been placed in the Outbox automatically and is waiting for next send retry.NEW ICON Send retry currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete message in this state.NEW ICON Send retry failed after third attempt; you can work with this message as with any other message.FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software198To create a personal signature:1. Press Command + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and then tap Preferences. 2. Tap Signature.3. Tap the Attach Signature check box to select it. 4. Enter your signature information. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. Forwarding e-mailYou can quickly forward e-mail messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder. To forward e-mail:1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail.2. Tap the e-mail message to display it.3. Press Command + F.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail199Alternately, tap the Forward button.4. Tap the word To. 5. On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient address. See the procedure for creating new e-mail earlier in this chapter for more information on addressing messages. 6. (Optional) Enter some text describing the forwarded message.7. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap Outbox to store it in the Outbox. NOTE Forwarded messages always send as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format.Replying to e-mailYou can reply to an e-mail as you are reading it, or start the reply when viewing messages in the folders list view.To reply to an e-mail that you are reading:1. Tap the e-mail you want to reply to.2. Press Command + O.Tap ForwardDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software200Alternately, tap Reply.3. In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.5. Enter a reply. 6. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap Outbox to send it later. NOTE Replied-to messages always send as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format.To reply to an e-mail from the folders list:1. On the message screen, press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Options menu. 2. Press Down on the navigator to move to the Reply option, and then press Select to select this option.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail201TIP Alternately, you can tap the folders pick list, select the folder that contains the e-mail, tap the envelope icon next to the message, and then tap Reply on the pick list.3. In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text. 4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.The e-mail is addressed. 5. Enter a reply.6. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap Outbox to send it later. NOTE Replied-to messages always send as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format.SHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software202Working with URLsYou can click on a URL in a received message to view the web page or file associated with the URL. Clicking the URL opens a browser window (using the default browser on your handheld) to view the page or file.Depending on whether the received message is displayed in HTML or plain text format, URLs will appear in slightly different forms, as follows:Messages displayed in HTML format contain the name of any image file URL that was included in the sent message, indicated in angle brackets as follows: <image.jpg not shown>. Clicking anywhere within the angle brackets opens a browser window to display the image file associated with the URL.Working with attachmentsYou can easily download, view, and send attachments with e-mail messages.Downloading attachments to your handheldAt times e-mail contains attached files, such as Microsoft Word or text files, that you want to view or install on your handheld. You can download and work with the following attached files:HTML URLs appear as blue underlined textPlain text URLs appear as any text beginning with “http://” or “www.”vCard (.vcf) This is an address.vCal (.vcs) This is usually a calendar appointment or a To Do task.Text (.txt) This is usually a memo or another plain text file. Voice Memo (.???) You can listen to downloaded Voice Memos using the VoicePad application on your handheld.HTML (.html or .htm) Usually a web page or a formatted text file. By default, the VersaMail application strips the formatting and shows only the text of most HTML attachments. However, some browsers allow other applications to pass them a file for viewing in full HTML. If your browser supports this function, you can view HTML attachments with all formatting intact. You do not need to do anything different in the steps for downloading and viewing attachments; the attachment is automatically opened in the correct format for your handheld (text only or full HTML) based on the applications you have installed.Microsoft Word (.doc) The formatting is stripped and shows the text of most Microsoft Word documents is shown. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail203Among the types of attachments you can receive are the following handheld application files:■Address Book entries■Date Book appointments■To Do list items■Text and Voice MemosYou can also save downloaded files—including files contained in a compressed ZIP file—to an expansion card. See “Saving attachments to an expansion card” later in this chapter for information.NOTE The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total, including attachments. If the attachment is too large, it cannot be downloaded to the handheld.JPEG files (.jpg These are graphics files. You can download these files and view them using the PhotoBase application on your handheld.Other application files For other types of application files, your handheld may contain a viewer that allows other applications to pass it a file for viewing. For example, your handheld may contain an image viewer that allows another application to pass it a GIF attachment for viewing. You do not need to do anything different in the steps for downloading and viewing attachments; if your handheld contains such a viewer, the attachment is automatically opened. If your handheld does not contain such a viewer, you cannot view the attachment. Among the file types that may be supported are GIF, MP3, WAV, and AAC files.PRC (.prc) This is a Palm OS® application that you can install and run on your handheld. PDB (.pdb) This is a file that works with specific Palm™ applications. ZIP (.zip) These are compressed files that contain other types of files, for example, text files or Word docs. You can download and uncompress (“unzip”) a ZIP file, then view the contents on your handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software204To download an attachment:1. In the Inbox, tap the message with the attachment. A paper clip icon appears on the message’s icon if the message has an attachment that has been downloaded.If you choose to get messages by subject only, you must tap More for each downloaded message in order to view the body of the e-mail message plus any attachments.If the option Download Attachments is selected in the VersaMail Preferences, any attachments that do not cause the message to exceed the maximum message size are downloaded. Otherwise, you see a message showing that the attachments were too large and asking if you would like to continue downloading them. For example, if the maximum message size is 5KB and you download a body of 2KB, then any attachment under 3KB is also downloaded, and any attachment over 3KB is not. See “Downloading large attachments” later in this chapter.If an attachment is not downloaded, the message will not show a paper clip icon in the Inbox even though it was sent with an attachment.2. Click the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. If the attachment is not downloaded, a paper clip icon will not appear even though the message was sent with an attachment. You must download the attachment for the paper clip icon to appear.Paper clip icon indicates downloaded attachment SHOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail2053. Your options for working with a downloaded attachment vary according to the file type.4. When you have finished viewing or installing the attachment, tap Done. This returns you to the Attachments dialog box, where you can select another attachment if you want to.5. When you have finished viewing or installing all attachments, tap Done on the Attachments dialog box. This returns you to the Message screen.Type ActionViewable file: text, Word doc, To Do task, HTML, graphic, and so onTap the name of the attachment you want to view, and then tap View. If there are multiple viewers registered on your handheld for the attachment file type, either use the default viewer shown, or select a viewer from the list. If there is only one viewer registered for the attachment file type, the list does not appear.Palm application or database file (.prc or .pdb)Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap Install. The file installs automatically.Compressed ZIP file Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap Unzip. The file uncompresses, and the files it contains are listed. Tap the name of the file you want to view or install, and then tap View or Install.Tap paper clip icon to view attachmentViewer pick list is displayed only if handheld has multiple viewers registered for attachment file typeButton displays View, Install, or Unzip depending on the attachment file typeDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software206Downloading large attachmentsDownloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your maximum message size, or a message with multiple attachments whose total size exceeds your maximum message size, requires some extra steps.To determine if a message has an attachment or multiple attachments that exceed the maximum message size:■In the Inbox, tap the message title.If the message plus attachments exceeds the maximum message size, the More button appears on the Message screen. In the case of multiple attachments, if some of the attachments were downloaded completely, you see both the paper clip icon (indicating fully downloaded attachments) and the More button (indicating incompletely downloaded attachments).To download a single attachment that exceeds the maximum message size:1. Tap the More button. 2. Tap No to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.More button indicates that message plus any attachments exceeds maximum message sizeMORETap MoreMOREDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail207Tap Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment. 3. (Optional) Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.When downloading is complete, the paper clip icon appears and the More button is no longer displayed. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter.To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size:1. Tap the paper clip icon. 2. Select one of the following:– To return to the Message screen, tap Cancel.– To view any fully downloaded attachments without continuing to download additional attachments, tap No.Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter.– To continue downloading all messages, tap Yes. 3. (Optional) Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software208When downloading is complete, the Attachments dialog box appears, showing all downloaded messages. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter.Saving attachments to an expansion cardIf you have purchased an expansion card that provides extra memory, you can save downloaded attachments to the expansion card.To save an attachment to an expansion card:1. Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.2. Follow the procedure for downloading attachments described earlier in this chapter.3. On the Attachments screen, tap Save to Card.4. Tap OK.Attaching files to e-mailYou can attach files on your handheld to e-mail messages you send. For example, you can attach files from the various handheld applications, such as any Date Book appointment (.vcs), To Do List tasks (.vcs), text memos (.txt), or Voice Memos (???). NOTE The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total, including attachments. The maximum number of attachments for any e-mail is ten, regardless of the attachments’ total size.You can attach the following types of files:■vCard (.vcf)■vCal (.vcs)■Memo/Text (.txt)■Voice Memo (???)■PRC (.prc)■PDB (.pdb)DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail209To attach a file to a message:1. Press Command + A.Alternately, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and then tap Add Attachment.2. Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.All files of the selected type appear in the Type box. For example, if you select Appointments (vCal), tap Date Book to see a list of appointments from a particular date that you can attach, or tap To Do to see To Do List tasks. 3. Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.Select type of file you want to attachPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software210The selected file appears in the Attachments box.4. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.TIP To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in the Attachments box and then tap Delete.5. Tap Send or Outbox. Uploading files from an expansion cardIf you have purchased an expansion card and have saved files to the card, you can upload files to attach to an e-mail message you are sending. Among the types of files you can upload from an expansion card are the following:■Word docs■HTML files■JPEG and GIF graphics files■MP3 and WAV audio files■AAC filesTo upload an attachment from an expansion card:1. Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.2. On the New Message screen, tap the Menu icon .3. Tap Options.4. Tap Add Attachment.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail2115. Tap the From pick list and select Files on Card.6. Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.Only file types that correspond to the types of files on the card will be displayed on the list. For example, if he card contains only Word docs and Address Book entries, only the file types “doc” and “vCard” will be listed. You can select a particular file type, or select All Files to view all files on the card. 7. Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.PICK LISTPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software212The selected file appears in the Attachments box.8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.TIP To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in the Attachments box and then tap Delete.9. Tap Send or Outbox.Forwarding an attachmentYou can include an attachments on any message you forward, up to the maximum message size.To forward a message with an attachment:1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail. 2. Tap the e-mail message to display it.3. Press Command + F.Alternately, tap the Forward button.4. Tap the word To. On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient address. See the procedure for creating e-mail earlier in this chapter for more information on addressing messages. 5. Follow the steps for the procedure for attaching files presented earlier in this chapter.Deleting messagesYou can delete one or more e-mail messages from any folder. For example, you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is placed in the Trash folder. See “Emptying the trash” later in this chapter.To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your handheld, you can select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences. If you don’t periodically empty the trash and delete messages on the server, any incoming e-mail may “bounce” back to the sender. See “Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail” later in this chapter. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail213To delete one or more messages:1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the message you want to delete.2. Do one of the following:3. Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Message menu.4. Press Down on the navigator to move to the Delete option, and then press Select to delete the message.TIP Alternately, you can tap the message icon next to a selected e-mail message and then tap Delete, or press Function + Menu and then select Delete. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. (Optional) Tap Also delete message on server if you want to delete the message from the server now.The selected messages move to the Trash folder and are deleted from your handheld when you empty the trash. If you set the preference to automatically empty the trash, the messages are deleted when the trash is emptied. By default, the trash auto-empties all deleted e-mail older than one week. See “Emptying the trash” later in this chapter for more information. Item to delete ActionOne message Tap the bullet next to the message’s icon.Multiple messages Tap the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete.A group of adjacent messagesDrag the stylus along the left of the message icons. To select another group, lift the stylus and select the next group of messages. If you selected the setting Delete Msgs on Server in VersaMail Preferences, this check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software214IMPORTANT If you delete a message on the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it again later.To delete messages before a certain date:1. Press press Function + Menu , and then tap Delete Old from the Message menu.2. Tap the Folder pick list and select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete.3. Tap the Older than pick list, and then tap One Week, One Month, or Choose Date.Displays the current folder for deleting messages PICK LISTPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail215If you tap Choose Date, you can select a date from the calendar.4. Tap Delete.5. (Optional) Tap Also delete message on server if you want to delete the message from the server now.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. Emptying the trashDeleted e-mail accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your handheld. To increase memory, you should empty the trash regularly. If you want to automatically empty the trash, you can set a preference to empty the trash immediately or empty any e-mail older than a certain number of days. To empty the trash:1. Press Command + E.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Empty Trash from the Message menu.NOTE If Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected in VersaMail Preferences, a message asks if you want to delete the trash. Tap a date to select it, or tap TodayDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2162. (Optional) Tap Details to see how many messages are in the Trash, and whether the messages are set to be deleted on the server.3. If you want to delete messages from the handheld as well as from the server, tap Both. A message asks if you want to update the server now. To delete the message from only the handheld now, tap Handheld. NOTE Many e-mail providers, such as Yahoo, have size restrictions for mail storage. If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders. To have the trash emptied automatically:1. Press Command + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Preferences.2. Tap Advanced.By default, Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected, and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Week.3. Tap the pick list, and select how often you want the e-mail messages automatically emptied from the trash. – Immediately.– Older Than 1 Day.– Older Than 3 Days.– Older Than 1 Week.– Older Than 1 Month.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail217Marking messages as read or unreadYou can mark messages as read or unread. When you tap a message to read it, it is automatically marked as read.To mark messages as read or unread:1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder you want.2. Tap the icon next to the message you want to mark.3. Tap Mark Read or tap Mark Unread.TIP To mark multiple messages, tap the bullets next to the messages you want, press Function + Menu and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread. 4. Tap Handheld to mark the messages as read or unread on your handheld. Tap Both to mark the messages on both the handheld and the server.PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software218If you tap Both, this message appears. Tap OK to connect with the server and immediately mark the messages as read or unread on the server. This action also processes any other pending actions on the server, such as messages not yet deleted.Tap Cancel if you want the messages marked during the next HotSync operation or the next time you connect to the server.NOTE Because POP servers do not support the read or unread message feature, the message is in bold or regular typeface for POP accounts on the handheld, but you can’t connect with the server to change the message state. Read messages appear in plain text; unread messages appear in bold text.Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mailVersaMail Preferences determine how the VersaMail application gets, sends, and deletes e-mail. To set e-mail preferences:1. Press Command + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Preferences.FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail2192. Select preferences:Get Enables you to retrieve the subject only or the entire message.Ask Every Time Displays a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve e-mail. If deselected, messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the Get pick list.Confirm Deletions Displays a confirmation dialog before deleting e-mail.Delete Msgs on Server If selected, automatically deletes messages on the server that you have deleted on your handheld. If not selected, you will be asked each time you delete messages on your handheld whether you want to also delete them on the server. Because mailboxes on the server usually have size restrictions, we recommend periodically deleting messages on the server. Download Attachments Causes files attached to e-mail to be automatically downloaded to your handheld. Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded. See “Working with attachments” earlier in this chapter for more information.Receive Format Enables you to retrieve messages in HTML format on in plain text format. If you choose HTML, any messages sent to you in HTML format will be displayed with basic HTML formatting intact. Other messages will be displayed as plain text. If you choose Plain Text, all messages will be displayed as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent. Default setting is HTML.See “Working with URLs” earlier in this chapter for more information on receiving e-mail in HTML format.Signature Enables you to attach a default signature to all your outgoing messages. See “Attaching a personal signature” earlier in this chapter for more information. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software220Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a messageYou can add or update an e-mail address in the Address Book directly from the body of a received e-mail message.To add a new Address Book entry:1. On the Message screen, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Add to Address Book.A dialog box appears with the “From” address displayed. If a Display Name exists for this Address Book entry, the Last name and First name fields show the display name.2. (Optional) If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and last name associated with the “From” e-mail address.3. Tap OK to add the e-mail address to the Address Book, and then tap OK in the confirmation dialog box.You can also update an existing Address Book entry with a new e-mail address, or create a second Address Book entry for a name that has an existing record. The procedure is the same as for adding a new Address Book entry. If you tap Add to Address Book from the body of an e-mail message and a record already exists for the recipient name, you are prompted either to update the e-mail address for the recipient or to create a new record for the recipient.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop221Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktopTo manage your e-mail on your desktop as well as on your handheld, you can synchronize an e-mail account on the handheld with an e-mail application on the desktop. You can use many popular e-mail applications, called clients, such as Microsoft Outlook, Eudora, Lotus Notes, Outlook Express, or any other e-mail clients that use MAPI. You must have a Windows computer to synchronize e-mail between your handheld and your computer.This section describes the following:■Starting the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit■Configuring and activating accounts in the HotSync Manager ■Synchronizing e-mail on the handheld with a desktop e-mail application■Converting attached files using attachment conversion plug-insConfiguring an account in HotSync ManagerBefore synchronizing an e-mail account, you configure the account’s settings in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit. The settings have to be specified only once unless you need to make changes. To start Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit:1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.2. Select Custom.3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list. 4. Click Change.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2225. Select Synchronize Active Accounts.6. (Optional) Select the check box Enable Informational Logging if you want the HotSync log to record information, such as errors encountered, about the conduit during a HotSync operation.7. (Optional) Select the check box Set Selection As Default to make the current settings the default settings for all accounts.Setting synchronization options and account settingsNext, you must configure each e-mail account’s general synchronization settings. For example, if you created an Earthlink e-mail account on the handheld and want to synchronize that with the desktop, set the synchronization options for the Earthlink account. During a HotSync operation, the Earthlink account on the handheld and the e-mail application specified in the conduit are synchronized.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop223To configure an account and set the synchronization options:1. On the VersaMail Configuration For User ... screen, click the plus sign to the left of the account you want to configure.2. Under the account name, click Sync Client.3. Select the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you perform a HotSync operation; otherwise, the account cannot be synchronized.Click plus signDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2244. Click the Mail Client pick list and select the desktop e-mail application you will use to synchronize the selected account with your handheld. For each application, additional setup information is displayed in the Optional Setup Notes box. See the following table for additional setup information for each client.TIP If your e-mail application is compatible with Extended MAPI, try Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option. If your e-mail application is compatible with Simple MAPI (SMAPI), try Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail Client option. Although Netscape uses SMAPI, Netscape is not supported. (Optional) If prompted, enter profile and password information for the client you selected.IMPORTANT You must select the synchronize check box and select a mail client in order to synchronize the account between your desktop and your handheld.Mail Client ActionMicrosoft Exchange 5.0 or laterSelect a MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit displays any existing MAPI profiles in the list.Microsoft Outlook 97 or later Select the MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit checks for any existing MAPI profiles and displays them in the list. Enter your password for Outlook. See “Configuring Microsoft Outlook” later in this chapter for the changes you need to make in Outlook. Microsoft Outlook Express 5.5 or laterIf you select Microsoft Outlook Express, enter the password for your e-mail account. See “Configuring Microsoft Outlook Express” later in this chapter for details. Lotus Notes Enter your Lotus Notes ID and password. Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID. Eudora 5.0 or later See “Configuring Eudora” later in this chapter for more information about the settings to make in Eudora.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop225Direct POP connection to serverSelect this option to synchronize an account by connecting directly with a POP server. You must enter the information about the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld when you create the e-mail account to access the server. You will enter information about the incoming (POP) server, outgoing (SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your password, and your e-mail address.During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings you made. If the settings do not exist or all server information is wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However, if the incoming server (POP) is correct, the Inbox is synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected. If the outgoing server (SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is synchronized (send e-mail) if you selected the option to synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct, then nothing happens.If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires APOP authentication, you must select the option to use APOP on your handheld. See “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter for details.If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use ESMTP on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for details.Direct IMAP connection to serverSelect this option to synchronize an account by connecting directly with an IMAP server. You must enter the information about the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld when you create the e-mail account to access the server. You will enter information about the incoming (IMAP) server, outgoing (SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your password, and your e-mail address.During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings you made. If the settings do not exist or all server information is wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However, if the incoming server (IMAP) is correct, the Inbox is synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected. If the outgoing server (SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is synchronized (send e-mail) if you selected the option to synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct, then nothing happens.If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use ESMTP on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for details.Mail Client ActionDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software226NOTE A profile contains configuration information, such as the location of incoming e-mail, your personal address book, and other information services that you can use. The profile may be MS Exchange Settings, your name, or something different. For more information on profiles, see your e-mail application’s documentation.5. Under the account name, click Sync Options.6. Enter the synchronization options you want:–Maximum Message Size (KB) for HotSync Operation: Enter the maximum message size from 1 to 2048KB. If the message exceeds the maximum size, the conduit truncates the message. For example, the maximum message size might be 50KB, and the message might have the following:Other e-mail applications Select Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option if your e-mail application is compatible with extended MAPI. If your e-mail application is compatible with SMAPI, select Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail Client option. Message header 1KBBody 20KBAttachment 1 40KBAttachment 2 20KBMail Client ActionDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop227In this case the conduit puts the message header, body, and attachment 2—totaling 41KB—on the handheld. Attachment 1 is removed because adding it to the message causes the message to exceed the maximum. –Days in Which to Synchronize Mail: Set how many days of e-mail, between 0 and 999, that e-mail should be synchronized. A value of 0 synchronizes all e-mail in the Inbox during the next HotSync operation. For other values, the conduit synchronizes e-mail for today and the number of days preceding today. For example, if you enter a value of 2, e-mail is synchronized for today and yesterday, but if you enter 3, e-mail is synchronized for today, yesterday, and the day before. –Synchronize unread messages only: Select whether to synchronize all e-mail between your desktop and your handheld, or unread e-mail only. By default, the check box is unselected, meaning that all e-mail will be synchronized.–Download attachments: Select whether to download attachments during synchronization. By default, the check box is selected; if unselected, only the body text of any message containing an attachment will be downloaded to your handheld during synchronization.–Send e-mail from Outbox: Select the Synchronize the Outbox check box to send any e-mail in the handheld’s Outbox during the next HotSync operation.–Synchronize Inbox: Select the Synchronize the Inbox check box to synchronize the Inbox during the next HotSync operation. 7. (Optional) If available, click Folder Synchronization Options and set folder synchronization options.(QUERY: When is the Folder Synchronization Options button available? What are the options if you click the button?)(QUERY: There is a Business Account Settings section of this screen; is this for i705 only?)You can now set synchronization options for your handheld for the selected account.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software228To set handheld synchronization settings:1. Under the selected account name, click the plus sign to the left of Device Settings.2. Click Account Information3. If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.E-mail Address Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing, such as examplename@yahoo.com.Click plus signDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop2294. Under Device Settings, click Server Settings.5. If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:–Incoming Mail Server: Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.–Incoming Mail Server Port Number: The default is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.–Whether this account requires APOP authentication (POP accounts only): Selecting this check box encrypts your username and password when traveling over the network. Some services require APOP to work properly, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports APOP, check with your e-mail provider. See “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter.–Outgoing Mail Server: Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.–Outgoing Mail Server Port Number: The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.–Whether this account requires ESMTP authentication: Select this option if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system Login Name Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.Password Enter the password for this account.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software230administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter. If you select this option, you will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username and password. 6. Click Save to save the settings for this account.(QUERY: Do we want to explain the buttons at the top of the configuration screen? Or is that overkill?)Verifying handheld account settings before synchronizing accountsCertain settings you configure on your handheld for a given e-mail account must be set correctly for the synchronization process as well. Before configuring an e-mail client on your desktop for synchronization, be sure to verify the following settings on your handheld:■APOP and ESMTP: If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires either APOP or ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use APOP or ESMTP on your handheld. See “Adding APOP to an account” and “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter for details.■Mail filters: Any mail filters you have configured for a given e-mail account on your handheld also apply during the synchronization process. For example, if you have set filters to accept only e-mail containing the subject words “Current Software Project,” only those same messages are synchronized between your desktop and your handheld. Be sure to turn mail filters off if you want to synchronize all messages between your desktop and your handheld. See “Turning filters on and off” later in this chapter for details.Configuring Microsoft OutlookYou can synchronize Microsoft Outlook 97/98/2000/XP with a VersaMail e-mail account, but you must set Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail handler. You must check your username and password.To configure Microsoft Outlook:1. In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click Internet Options. 2. Click the Programs tab.3. Select Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail program.4. Click OK. NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Microsoft Outlook.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop231Configuring Microsoft Outlook ExpressYou can synchronize a VersaMail e-mail account with Microsoft Outlook Express 5.5 or 6.0, but you must set Outlook Express as the default e-mail handler.NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Outlook Express.To configure Outlook Express: 1. In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click Internet Options. 2. Click the Programs tab.3. Select Outlook Express as the default e-mail program.4. Click OK. TIP You can also make Outlook Express the default e-mail handler within the e-mail application. From the Tools menu, select Options. Click the General tab, and then click Make Default. Configuring EudoraIf you are using Eudora as your e-mail application, you must set up MAPI in Eudora. To set up MAPI in Eudora:1. From the Eudora Tools menu, select Options.2. Do one of the following: – If Eudora is the only e-mail application that you use, select Always as the MAPI setting.– If you use more than one e-mail application, select When Eudora is running as the MAPI setting.3. Ensure that your username and password are set up correctly within Eudora. This information is needed to log in to Eudora to retrieve and synchronize your e-mail.IMPORTANT Eudora must be running in order for you to perform a HotSync operation. The VersaMail application synchronizes with your Dominant Personality in Eudora 5.1 or later.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software232Converting attached filesYou can use attachment conversion plug-ins to convert attached files that you are receiving. Your handheld comes with DataViz Documents To Go version 5 installed, and Documents To Go plug-ins are automatically configured. Documents To Go enables you to convert attachments using HotSync operations. With Documents To Go, you can view Word, Excel, and PowerPoint attachments on your handheld. See the Documents To Go Getting Started Manual for more information.When you receive a message with an attachment on your handheld, the file is converted to the DataViz format on the handheld when you perform a HotSync operation. You can then read and edit the file in Documents To Go on the handheld. In the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit, you can turn off DataViz Documents To Go plug-ins or select other plug-ins.To turn off attachment conversion plug-ins:1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.2. Select Custom.3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop2334. Click Attachment Conversion.5. Plug-in types are listed in the left column. If the plug-in is selected, the right column shows the name of the company supplying the plug-in. If a plug-in is not selected, the right column reads Not Selected.NOTE The drop-down lists in the right column display only the companies currently supplying plug-ins for a particular type. If more than one company supplies a plug-in of a particular type (for example, Word doc), then multiple company names appear on the list. If no company is currently supplying a plug-in of a particular type, then the only option that appears on the list is Not Selected.Do one of the following:6. Click save.Item ActionTo deselect a plug-in Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and then select Not Selected from the drop-down list.To select a plug-in Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and then select the name of the company supplying the plug-in from the drop-down list.To change the company supplying a plug-in of a particular typeClick the right column next to the plug-in type name, and then select the name of the company you want to supply the plug-in from the drop-down list.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software234Synchronizing an accountTo synchronize accounts, you must set the HotSync action for the VersaMail application in the HotSync Manager. You can, however, exclude e-mail accounts from a HotSync operation. TIP If you don’t want an account synchronized, deselect the check box Select this check box to synchronize this e-mail account when you perform a HotSync operation. To select which accounts are synchronized during a HotSync operation:1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.2. Select Custom.3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.4. Click Change.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop2355. Select one of the following:6. (Optional) Select Set Selection As Default to apply the options you selected to all subsequent HotSync operations. Otherwise, the settings apply to the next HotSync operation only.7. Click OK.8. Perform a HotSync operation.Synchronization limitsYou can synchronize more than one account during the same HotSync operation. The maximum number of accounts you can synchronize are as follows:■1 Simple MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook Express or Eudora)■1 Extended MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook)■1 Lotus Notes account■5 combined direct POP or direct IMAP accountsIf you attempt to synchronize more than the limit for a particular type of account during a HotSync operation, you will receive an alert prompting you to deactivate any accounts over the allowed number.Using SSL with the conduitWhen you set up an e-mail account, you can choose to use a secure connection (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) for sending and receiving e-mail messages. The Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit supports SSL when synchronizing with an e-mail account only if that account uses one of the following desktop e-mail applications (mail clients):■Outlook■Outlook Express■EudoraThe conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct POP or direct IMAP.Synchronize Active Accounts Select this option to include active accounts in the next HotSync operation. For an account to be synchronized, you must have selected the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you performed a HotSync operation. Do Nothing Select this option to exclude e-mail accounts from the next HotSync operation.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software236Going beyond the basicsMany of the VersaMail application features, such as getting and sending e-mail, you use daily. Other features are used less frequently but are especially valuable in certain situations. For example, filtering e-mail is helpful if you are traveling and want to receive messages only from certain people or about specific subjects. Filters and other special features are discussed in this chapter. This section describes the following:■Creating and using filters to determine which e-mail you actually view■Managing mail settings■Adding APOP to an account■Adding ESMTP to an account■Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applications■Using the command bar■Viewing e-mail header details■Backing up your mail databases■Synchronizing IMAP folders wirelessly■Accessing corporate e-mail■Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)■Viewing the wireless coverage indicator■Troubleshooting common account access problemsThe chapter ends with a summary of the VersaMail application navigator controls and keyboard shortcutsManaging mail filtersFilters provide efficient ways to manage e-mail retrieval and storage. When you tap Get Mail or Get & Send, filters determine which e-mail messages are downloaded to your handheld and in which folder the downloaded messages are stored. For example, you may want to file e-mail about sales meetings in a Sales folder. You can create a filter that automates this action, so that whenever you receive e-mail about sales meetings, it is immediately sent to the Sales folder, which you created in the filters screen. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics237Creating mail filtersTo create a mail filter, you select various criteria, such as To, From, and Contains. This information makes up the filter statement. For example, if you want stock quotes from your online brokerage service sent to a specific folder, you can filter those e-mail messages and store them in the Inbox folder. The filter statement, which is displayed in the Filter Editor, is shown in the following figure.To create a filter:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Options, and then select Filter Mail.3. Tap New.4. Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field.5. Use the If the pick lists to create criteria for the filter.FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software238The three pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement that identifies the type of e-mail and where you want the e-mail stored. For example, a filter might read, “If the [Subject] [Contains] sales meeting, Then get mail and move to [Sales].” When you use this filter to sort incoming e-mail, any e-mail containing sales meetings in the subject line is filed in the Sales folder.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.The filter appears in the Filters list.Selected filters execute in the order in which they appear on the list. Move filters up and down the list to ensure that they execute in the correct order.NOTE Filters created on the handheld also apply to e-mail synchronization. See “Synchronizing an account” earlier in this chapter for more information. Turning filters on and offBy default, a filter that is turned on or selected affects all subsequent downloads of e-mail until you deselect it. More than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you download e-mail, be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you don’t want.To pick list Select the message header field with the information contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject, cc, Date, Size. For example, you might select Date to download only messages that are less than a certain number of days old. Contains pick list Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT Contain. Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For example, if you want to sort e-mail with the subject Sales, enter “Sales.” If you enter more than one criteria, separate each with a comma, for example—Sales, New York.Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your filtered e-mail to go. You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming e-mail. Tap Edit Folders, and then create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones. FLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics239To turn a filter on or off:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Options, and then select Filters.The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created. 3. Tap the pick list in the upper-left corner, and select Connected Accounts or Synchronize Only Accounts.– Connected applies a filter to a modem transaction. – Sync Only applies a filter to a HotSync operation.4. Tap the filter check boxes to select the filters you want to use for subsequent e-mail transactions.IMPORTANT If you deselect a filter listed under Connected, be sure that the filter is deselected also under Synchronize. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Filters with a check mark are turned onFLOWFLOWDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software240Editing or deleting a filterYou can edit a filter to change its name or the criteria in the filter. To edit or delete a filter:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Select Options, and then select Filters.3. Tap the name of the filter.4. Do one of the following:– To edit the filter, revise your entry in the Name field and/or your selections in the pick lists, and revise the text in the edit line. Tap OK.– To delete the filter, tap Delete, and then tap Yes to confirm deletion.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Managing mail settingsYou can configure advanced mail settings such as server information, incoming and outgoing mail server options, and more for each e-mail account. To select the account whose settings you want to manage:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Select Mail Servers.Shows server settings for current account. Tap the Account pick list to edit the accountDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics2414. Tap the Account pick list, and then tap Edit Accounts.5. Tap the name of the account whose settings you want to manage, and then tap OK.To change the protocol type:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap the Protocol pick list, and then tap POP or IMAP. 2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To change your username or password:1. In the Server Settings screen, enter a new username. Your username is typically the first part of your e-mail address, which appears before the @ symbol.All e-mail accounts appear in the listPICK LISTPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2422. Tap the Password box, and enter a new password in the Password Entry dialog box.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. To set a default service for this account (different from the default service for your handheld):1. In the Server Settings screen, tap the Always Connect Using check box.2. Tap the connection type you want from the Services pick list.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.NOTE Select this option only if you want a given e-mail account to use a different service from the default service you set for your handheld. For example, you may have selected a default service that uses the built-in 802.11b radio on your handheld to make a dial-up connection with your corporate account through a VPN. However, for your Earthlink account, you may want to switch to the Earthlink service, which uses a Bluetooth Card inserted into your handheld’s card expansion slot to make a connection with your GPRS service provider. To do this, tap this check box, then select Earthlink from the Services pick list. Leave this box deselected if you want to use your default handheld service for this e-mail account. See Chapter 18 for information on setting connection types and selecting a default service for your handheld. See “Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for details on using a different service for a specific e-mail account.Tap to change the service connection for this e-mail account only from your default handheld service connectionSelect a service connection for this e-mail account onlyPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics243To change e-mail address/mail server settings:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Address/Servers.3. Edit any of the following:4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.E-mail address Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing, such as examplename@yahoo.com.Incoming mail server Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.Outgoing mail server Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software244To change incoming mail server settings:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Incoming Mail.3. Select or enter either of the following:.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.If you are using the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit and have an IMAP account, you must configure the outgoing mail settings to send mail.Get unread mail ONLY Retrieves unread e-mail only. To get all e-mail and not just unread e-mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY. Maximum Message Size Shows the maximum message size that you can receive. PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics245To set additional incoming mail options:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.3. The incoming mail options are different depending on the connection type you selected and the server protocol—POP or IMAP.Port Number Defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator. Secure Connection Retrieves incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.Leave mail on server (POP only) Leaves e-mail that you receive on the handheld on the server also.Use APOP (POP only) Encrypts your username and password when traveling over the network. Some services require APOP to work properly, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports APOP, check with your e-mail provider. See “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter.NEW SCREENPOP accountsIMAP accountsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software246To set outgoing mail server (SMTP) settings:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Outgoing Mail.3. Enter any of the following:Mailbox (IMAP only) Defines the root mailbox on your IMAP server. Deleted Mail (IMAP only) Stores deleted e-mail in the folder you specify on the server. This field is case sensitive, so spell the folder name exactly as it is on the server. For example, if your Deleted Mail folder is called Trash on the server, you must enter Trash in this space. Sent Mail (IMAP only) Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. This field is case sensitive, and the folder name should be spelled exactly as it is on the server. Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.”Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e-mail messages, only if it is different from the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look like the e-mail came from the address you entered.BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your desktop e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics2474. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. To set additional outgoing mail options:1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.3. Set additional options for outgoing e-mail:Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.Secure Connection Sends outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) connection. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.My server requires authentication (ESMTP)Select this option if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this chapter. If you select this option, you will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2484. Press Function + Enter twice, or tap OK twice.Adding APOP to an accountTo encrypt your username and password when traveling over the network, some services require APOP to work properly, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports APOP, check with your e-mail provider.NOTE APOP works only with accounts that use the POP protocol.To edit an account and add APOP:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Select Mail Servers.4. Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.5. Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.Username and Password fields appear only if ESMTP check box is selectedAll e-mail accounts appear in the listPICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics2496. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.7. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.8. Select the Use APOP check box. 9. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. Adding ESMTP to an accountSome services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on a given SMTP server. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports ESMTP, check with your e-mail provider.To edit an account and add ESMTP:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Select Mail Servers.PICK LISTDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software2504. Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.5. Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.6. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.7. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.8. Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check box. You will be prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.9. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. All e-mail accounts appear in the listPICK LISTPICK LISTUsername and Password fields appear only iESMTP check box is selectedDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics251Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applicationsYou can copy any text from an e-mail message, either from one you have composed or have read or from an attachment you have downloaded and opened (such as a Word doc), for use elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another application. Text you can select and copy includes:■A name■An e-mail address■Body text of an e-mail message or a downloaded attachmentTo copy and paste text from an e-mail message:1. Select the text by dragging the stylus over it.2. Press Command + C.3. To paste the text elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another application, go to the new location and press Command + V.You can also cut or copy text from a Word document that you download as an attachment and view on your handheld. You can then paste this text in another part of the Word document, another Word document, or another application on your handheld.To cut/copy and paste text from within a Word document:(QUERY: What are the steps?)See “Performing common tasks” in Chapter 4 (X-REF) for more information on copying and pasting.Using the command barThe command bar provides shortcuts for performing numerous tasks. The options presented on the command bar may change, depending on which screen is displayed in the application. For example, if you are viewing a message in the Inbox, the command bar gives you the option of quickly moving the message to another folder. See “Moving e-mail between folders” earlier in this chapter.To access the command bar on your handheld:■Press Command on the keyboard.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software252For each type of screen, the command bar offers various options.See “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 3 (X-REF) for more information on the command bar.View OptionsList (Inbox, Outbox, and so on showing list of messagesSelect all messages.Deselect all messages.Change display font (toggles between large and small font).Delete messages from the handheld; icon appears only if you have previously selected all messages.Reading a message Delete message from the handheld.Move message to a different folder; select folder from pick list.Change display font (toggles between large and small font).Composing a message Insert the @ symbol into a recipient’s e-mail address.Add attachment.Undoes last action; icon appears in command bar only if you have previously performed one of the actions above or any of the cut/copy/paste functions described below.Reading or composing a message Cuts selected text.Copies selected text.Pastes selected text.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics253E-mail header detailsWhen viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message header. The e-mail header options as follows:■Short header: Shows sender’s name or address (From field) and subject line (Subj field).■Full header: Shows the following:– Sender’s name or e-mail address (From field)– Subject line (Subj field)– Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field)– Size of message including any attachments (Size field)– Recipient’s name or e-mail address (To field)You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing. Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject fields.Tap header icon to switch to full headerShort header shows sender name and message subject onlyTap header icon to switch to short headerFull header shows sender, subject, date, size, and recipient informationDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software254To switch between short header and full header view, tap the header icon in the upper-right corner of the message screen.Backing up mail databasesIn most cases your e-mail is on your server, so you do not need to back up your e-mail database from your handheld. If you want to make sure you have a current copy of all your e-mail, you can back up all the e-mail databases from the handheld. To back up the e-mail database:1. Press Command + R.Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select Preferences. 2. Tap System. 3. Tap Backup ALL Databases to select it. NOTE If you don’t select this option, HotSync operations are faster.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. NEW SCREEN SHOTS OF FULL/SHORT HEADERS ON MESSAGE SCREENDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics255Wireless IMAP folder synchronizationIf you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server, you can wirelessly synchronize e-mail messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder, or delete in the folder. When you synchronize a folder, any e-mail messages in the selected folder on the mail server will be downloaded to the same folder on your handheld. Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your handheld will be moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server.Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and/or the mail server, you may have to perform some steps before you can wirelessly synchronize e-mail messages between your handheld and the server, as follows:■If you need to create a folder on both your handheld and the server, see “Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. Be sure to select the Also create on server check box as described in that section, After creating the folders, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders.■If there is a folder on the mail server but need to create it on your handheld. see “Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. You do not need to select the Also create on server check box as described in that section. After creating the folder, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders below.■If you have a folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders.You can synchronize either a single pair of handheld/mail server folders, or multiple pairs of folders.NOTE You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length. You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create, in addition to the default folders Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Trash.To wirelessly synchronize a single pair of handheld/mail server IMAP folders:1. From within an IMAP e-mail account, tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen and select the folder you want to synchronize.2. Tap Get Mail.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software256To synchronize multiple pairs of IMAP folders:1. In your Inbox or another folder screen of an IMAP e-mail account, press Function + Menu .2. Select Options.3. Press Command + L (alternately, select Sync IMAP Folders). 4. Select the folders you want to synchronize from the pick list either by tapping the folder name or by using the navigator, as follows:5. A connection is made to your network provider to update the server with changes from your handheld, and to have your handheld updated with changes from the server.Accessing corporate e-mailMany corporate e-mail servers—including Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino servers—support direct IMAP access. If you are accessing your e-mail using the VersaMail application and an 802.11 network behind your company’s firewall, you may be able to directly access your corporate e-mail. If your company requires extra security or you are accessing your e-mail through either a dial-up connection or a LAN outside of your company’s firewall, you will need to use a Virtual Private Network (VPN) client before you can access your business e-mail. Check with your company’s network administrator for information about VPN access, your business e-mail username and password, and IMAP and SMTP settings. See (X-REF) for information on setting up a VPN on your handheld.Button ActionSelect If no folder is selected, the Select button highlights the first visible folder on the list. If a folder is selected, the Select button toggles the check box between selected and deselected.Up or Down If a folder is selected, the Up and Down scroll up or down one folder on the list. If no folder is selected, Up and Down scroll up or down one page.Left If a folder is selected, deselects the folder. No function is no folder is selected.Right No function.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics257Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send to or receive from a network or the Internet is secure and authentic. The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of e-mail messages that you send and receive. When you set up an account in the VersaMail application, you are given the option of selecting SSL for both incoming and outgoing mail. See “Setting up and managing e-mail accounts” earlier in this chapter for instructions.If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, then SSL is supported in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit when you synchronize with that account as well.NOTE You cannot use push mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of e-mail with accounts that use an SSL connection. See “Push mail with notification” and “Send retry” earlier in this chapter for information.Viewing the wireless coverage indicatorYour handheld contains a status indicator for determining the strength of wireless coverage in your area. You can access this indicator from the within the VersaMail application by pressing Command + (QUERY: What key do you press to see the indicator?). See (X-REF to wireless coverage indicator section) for more information.Troubleshooting account access problemsTopics:■some providers force you to be on their networks■settings frequently change■anything else?(QUERY: Steve: need your help here, both what to include & what to say about it)DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software258Five-way navigation in the VersaMail applicationThe following table summarizes the controls for the five-way navigator on your handheld that are specific to the VersaMail application. See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 (X-REF) for general navigator information.View Selection Navigation FunctionMain List (Inbox or other folder list)No message selected Up/Down Scrolls between messages in list.Select Highlights the first message in the list.Right No function.Left No function.Message selected Select Opens messages for viewing.Right Displays context menu that normally appears when clicking on the e-mail icon for each message.Left Returns you to the “no message selected” options.Compose New Message N/A Up/Down In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields: Tabs to the next/previous field.In message body text: Scrolls the text viewed on the text list.Select No function.Right In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields: Moves to the next character.In message body text: No function.Left In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields: Moves to previous character.In message body text: No function.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics259When you return from viewing a message to the list view (Inbox or other folder), the message you were viewing may or may not be selected in the list, according on the following:■If you pressed Select to view the message, the message will be highlighted on the list on when you return to the list view■If you used the stylus or pressed Right or Left to view the message, the message will not be highlighted when you return to the list view. If you press Select, the first message in the list will be selected.The following sample procedure shows how to use the navigator to read and delete a message.To read and delete a message:1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read.2. Press Select to select the message, and then press Select again to open the message.3. After reading the message, press Select to close the message.4. (Optional) The cursor should remain on the selected message. If not, press Up or Down to scroll to the message, and press Select to select the message.5. Press Right to open the pop-up menu.6. Press Down to scroll to Delete Message.7. Press Select to delete the message.8. Press Select to confirm that you want to delete the message.Read Message N/A Up/Down Scrolls the message text.Select Returns you to list view.Right Displays the next message. If you are is viewing the last message, returns you to the folder list view.Left Displays the previous message. If you are viewing the first message in the folder, returns you to the folder list view.View Selection Navigation FunctionDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software260Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail applicationThe following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts specific to the VersaMail application. See (X-REF TO SHORTCUT INFO) for general keyboard shortcut information.To use a keyboard shortcut:1. Press Command .2. Press the letter of the shortcut.ShortCut FeatureA Add Attachment(QUERY: is this still being used?)CCopyDDeleteEEmpty TrashF Forward MessageHMark ReadI Mark UnreadKKeyboardL Address LookupMGet MessageN Create New MessageO Reply to Message(QUERY: is this still being used?)PPasteQGo to BottomRPreferences ...SSelect AllTGo to TopU UndoVMove To …DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics261W Save to DraftXCutYSendZ Deselect AllPress & hold Mail Get & SendShortCut FeatureDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software262DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
263CHAPTER 15Using Palm™ Web BrowserPalm™ Web Browser is your gateway to the web. Use Palm Web Browser to do the following:■Visit web pages. ■Change your home page.■Bookmark your favorite sites.Using Palm Web Browser’s featuresPalm Web Browser is a fast web browser that has a number of features that make it easy to use. The browser is secure and has an informative tips that help you effectively access the web.Palm Web Browser is easy to usePalm Web Browser is easy to use because it works much like the web browsers you use on your desktop computer. You can enter web addresses (also called URLs—Uniform Resource Locators), create bookmarks to mark favorite pages, save pages, and even download files directly to your handheld. More importantly, Palm Web Browser is designed to be used on the small screen of your handheld. It forces images to fit the handheld’s screen; it doesn’t clutter your screen with fancy icons; and it handles technical features (like plug-ins) with minimal input from you. Palm Web Browser is fastPalm Web Browser is designed with the knowledge that you may be viewing web pages using a slow connection. Palm Web Browser processes each web page to make the download as fast as possible, compressing the text, removing some large images, and compressing other images. In addition, Palm Web Browser has preferences that you can adjust to make downloading even faster.Because wireless Internet connections tend to be slower than the wired connections common on desktop computers, Palm Web Browser also avoids downloading a web page when it can display that page from memory. Before it downloads a web page, it can check with the web server to see if the content in memory is up-to-date.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser264If you set the option to display web pages already in memory, you are on occasion likely to see a web page with a banner that says something like, “This content is X days old.” This banner informs you that instead of connecting to the Internet, Palm Web Browser is displaying a page from memory. Of course, you can refresh the page anytime. You can also have Palm Web Browser display a confirmation dialog box so that you must manually accept every connection made to the Internet.Palm Web Browser is securePalm Web Browser uses advanced encryption technology from Certicom. Encryption makes your data unreadable by anyone but the intended recipient. This encryption technology is used to secure the transmission of sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, e-mail messages, and passwords. Data is protected both when sent from your handheld over the network and when coming in from the Internet directly to your handheld. For more information about Certicom’s encryption technology, visit the Certicom web site: www.certicom.com.When a wireless transaction is secured, the command button that initiates the transaction is marked by the security icon, which looks like a key:It’s not unusual to experience an additional delay of several seconds when a transaction is being encrypted.What Palm Web Browser looks likeWhen you start Palm Web Browser for the first time, the following screen—the default home page—appears:The Palm Web Browser screen has three parts:■The title bar displays the name of the current web page.■The action icons let you navigate in the browser, refresh pages, and look at your lists of favorite pages.Security iconTitle barAction iconsWeb contentDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Palm Web Browser’s features265■The rest of the screen is devoted to displaying the content of the web page.You can perform other actions by tapping items in menus. Like other Palm OS® applications, when you press Function + Menu , the title bar is replaced by the menu bar.Getting help in Palm Web BrowserHelp is available in the following locations:■The links under Web Browser Tips on the Palm Web Browser home page.■Most dialog boxes in Palm Web Browser have help about the options in the dialog box. To see that information, tap the Tips icon .Menu barMenu itemsLinks to Help topicsTap the Tips icon for more information on a dialog box.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser266Opening Palm Web BrowserTo open Palm Web Browser:■Press the Wireless application button on the front panel of your handheld. Palm Web Browser may take a moment to load the first page.■Press Home . and then select the Web Browser icon . When you open Palm Web Browser, you immediately go to your home page. Browsing the Web on your handheldJust like the web browser you use on your desktop computer, Palm Web Browser lets you browse the web in several ways:■Visit a web page by entering its web address, also called a URL.■Visit another web page by tapping a link. ■Go back to the pages you already visited by using the Back and Forward icons. Visiting a web pageTo visit a web page:1. Press Command Stroke + O, or tap the Open URL icon .2. Enter the URL of the web page you want to visit. The field in the Open URL dialog box already contains the characters “www.” If the web address you want to enter starts with another set of letters, just drag over the “www.” and press the Delete key to erase them.Tap buttons to enter other characters commonly used in web addresses.3. Tap Go. Wireless button(Optional) Tap buttons to complete the web addressDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Browsing the Web on your handheld267During the short delay while the new page is downloaded, the title bar displays information about the download process.Following a linkMany web pages contain links, which are text or pictures that when clicked, take you to another web page or to another part of the same page. Like many other web browsers, Palm Web Browser highlights these links by underlining them.To follow a link:■Tap the link. Returning to a web page you just visitedTo go back to the last web page you visited:■Tap the Back icon .To go back to an earlier page:■Tap the Back icon until you return to the page you want.The list of stored pages (which is limited by your handheld’s memory) is called the History list. Stop icon changes appearance during downloadIndicates how much data has been downloaded so far (in kilobytes)Tells you what Palm Web Browser is doing (receiving data, sending data)LinksDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser268To go forward through the History list:■Tap the Forward icon .Returning to your home pageYour home page is the web page Palm Web Browser displays every time you open it. To return to your home page:■Tap the Home icon .“Changing your home page” later in this chapter for information about changing your home page.Downloading a file to your handheldPalm Web Browser can download files such as text files, word processor documents, or pictures, as well as web pages. Downloading a file is much like visiting a web page.To download a file by following a link from a web page:1. Tap the link.When you download a Palm OS® application (PRC) or Palm OS database (PDB), your handheld recognizes the file and installs it.2. If a warning message appears asking you to confirm the file you want to download, and the file is the one you want, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.3. If the file has to be handed off to another application (such as Address Book), you see a dialog box that prompts you to accept the file transfer.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Refreshing a page269The progress information in the title bar tells you how much data has been downloaded to your handheld.If your handheld can’t recognize the file type, you see an alert dialog box that tells you that the file is in an unknown format. Palm Web Browser does not download the file.Stopping the download processIf you decide that the download process is taking too long, you can stop it. To stop a page or a file from downloading:■Tap the Stop icon .You can make changes to improve the download speed, such as removing images from your web pages. See “Changing how images are downloaded” later in this chapter.Refreshing a pageSome web pages, such as news sites, change frequently. If you visit a page and spend several minutes reading an article, the web site may change during that time. To make sure you have the latest content, refresh the page.To refresh a page:■Tap the Refresh icon .You can also view old content instead of accessing the Internet. (See “Controlling how Palm Web Browser accesses the Internet” later in this chapter.) Palm Web Browser lets you know you’re looking at old content by putting a banner at the top of the page. You can force Palm Web Browser to download the latest content from the Internet by refreshing the page.BannerDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser270Viewing information about a web pageBecause of the limited space on the handheld screen, Palm Web Browser doesn’t display the current web address (URL) all the time. To find the name, size, and address of the current web page, open the Web Page Info dialog box.To view information about the current web page:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Info in the Page menu.To see the entire URL, tap the box. The URL displays in the URL Viewer.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.You can also use this method to view information about saved pages. However, the information you see might be different from the information for regular web pages.Bookmarking Your Favorite PagesWhen you read a printed book, you place a bookmark at the page where you stopped reading so that you can remember where you stopped. In the same way, you can bookmark a web page for later reference. A bookmark in Palm Web Browser doesn’t store the actual page; instead, it stores a reference to the page’s web address (URL).Adding a bookmarkIf you would like to visit the current page again, add a bookmark to the Bookmark list.To add a bookmark for the current page:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Bookmark URL in the Page menu.3. (Optional) Change the bookmark name, URL, or category. Tap here to change the bookmark nameTap here to change the URLTap here to choose a categoryDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Bookmarking Your Favorite Pages2714. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.You can also add a bookmark by going to the Web Content dialog box, tapping Bookmarks, and then tapping Add.Visiting a bookmarked pageUse your list of bookmarks to visit a particular page again.To visit a bookmarked page:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Bookmarks.3. Tap the name of the bookmarked page you want to visit. 4. Tap Go.Editing information about a bookmarkYou can edit the name and URL of a bookmark, and change its category.To edit information about a bookmark:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Bookmarks.3. Tap the name of the bookmark you want to edit.4. Tap Edit.5. Tap the Name field, and then enter the new name. 6. Tap the URL box to display the URL Viewer and change the address.Bookmarked page nameScroll barDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser2727. Tap the Category pick list to change the category or create a new category.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to return to the Web Content dialog box.9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Deleting a bookmarkYou can delete bookmarks that you no longer want.To delete a bookmark:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Bookmarks.3. Tap the name of the bookmarked page you want to delete.4. Tap Edit.5. Tap Delete.A confirmation dialog box appears.6. Tap Delete.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Saving PagesAlthough Palm Web Browser keeps a History list of all the pages you visited recently, it doesn’t keep items in the list indefinitely. If you want to save a page (such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt) indefinitely, create a saved page. A saved page is a copy of the page. The copy is stored on the handheld until you delete it.Saving a pageTo save a web page:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Save Page in the Page menu.3. (Optional) Change the page name or category.Tap here to enter the new nameTap here to change the categoryDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Saving Pages2734. Tap Save.You can also save a page by going to the Web Content dialog box, tapping Saved Pages, and then tapping Save.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser274Opening a saved pageWhen you open a saved page, remember that you’re only seeing a copy of the actual page. To view the current version of the web page, enter the web address again.To open a saved page:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Saved Pages.3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to open.4. Tap Go. The page displays with a banner indicating when you saved the page. Editing information about a saved pageYou can edit the name of a saved page and change its category.To edit information about a saved page:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Saved Pages.3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to open.4. Tap Edit.5. Tap the Name field, and then enter the new name. Tap a name to select that pageDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Finding Web Pages You Recently Visited2756. Tap the Category pick list to change the category or create a new category.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to return to the Web Content dialog box.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Copying text from a page to another applicationTo copy the text of a web page into another application, use Copy Page. Copy Page doesn’t copy images, only text.To copy text from a page:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Edit, and then tap Copy Page.You can then paste the copied page into another application, such as Memo Pad.Deleting a saved page To delete a saved page:1. Tap the Web Content icon .2. Tap Saved Pages.3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to delete.4. Tap Edit.5. Tap Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears.6. Tap Delete.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Finding Web Pages You Recently VisitedUsing the Back and Forward icons to browse through the pages you recently visited, one page at a time, can be tedious. Instead, use the History list to view a list of the pages you visited and go directly to any page in that list. The History list Tap here to enter the new nameTap here to change the categoryDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser276contains a record of all of the pages you visited recently, up to the limit you set in Web Preferences. Returning to a page you visitedTo return to a page you visited:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap History in the Page menu.3. Tap the name of the web page you want to visit.Clearing the History listIf you need to free up memory on your handheld, clearing the History list can help. IMPORTANT Clearing the History list removes all record of your recent browsing history. If you need to remember the location of a page you recently visited, create a bookmark or a saved page for that page before clearing the History list.To clear the History list:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap History in the Page menu.3. Tap Clear.A confirmation dialog box appears.4. Tap Delete.NOTE This action only clears the contents of the History list. Your bookmarks and saved pages are not deleted.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.To change the default size of the History list so that it doesn’t use so much memory, see “Changing the size of the History list”later in this chapter.Tap a name to go to that pageDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser277Customizing Palm Web BrowserYou can change Palm Web Browser to improve the speed, ease-of-use, and security of your browsing experience.Changing the default size of textIf the default size of the text is too small, you can increase the size.To change the default size of text:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap the appropriate menu item:– Tap Bigger Font to make the text appear larger.– Tap Smaller Font to make the text return to its original size.Changing your home pageYour home page is the web page that displays when you first open Palm Web Browser. You can change your home page to any web address.To change your home page:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap Home Page.4. Do one of the following:– Enter the address of the new home page.– Tap Current Page to make the page currently displayed in Palm Web Browser your home page.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap here to enter a new web address(Optional) Tap a button to complete the web addressDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser278Changing how images are downloadedImages in web pages can be very large. You can make web pages download faster by reducing image quality or removing images altogether. Alternatively, if you have a fast Internet connection, you can have images downloaded so that they appear at their highest quality.To change how images are downloaded and displayed:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap General.4. Select one of the following items from the Graphics pick list:5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Enabling or disabling autofillFilling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of information: your name, address, phone number, and so on. By default, Palm Web Browser stores the information you entered in these fields. The next time you use that order form and type in the first few letters in a field, Palm Web Browser remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with those letters, and fills in the field.No Images All web pages are downloaded without images.Fastest Images are compressed. This makes downloading faster, but results in reduced image quality.Standard Image quality is average. This is the default setting and the best compromise between speed and image quality.Best Quality Images are downloaded at their highest quality. This may result in longer download times.Tap the pick list to see the list of choicesDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser279To enable or disable autofill:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap General.4. In the Autofill text fields check box, do one of the following:– To turn off autofill, tap to remove the check mark.– To turn on autofill, tap to select it.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Enabling or disabling cookiesSome web sites store information in a small text file, called a “cookie.” Cookies usually contain information about you and your preferences for that web site. A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit.Allowing a web site to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your handheld. A cookie only stores the information you provide while visiting the web site.By default, Palm Web Browser saves the cookies it receives. You can tell it not to accept cookies.To enable or disable cookies:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap General.4. In the Enable cookies check box, do one of the following:– To prevent Palm Web Browser from storing cookies, tap to remove the check mark.– To accept cookies, tap to select it.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Changing the size of the History listBecause memory on your handheld is often limited, the default limit of the History list is 500 kilobytes. You can increase or decrease the size.To change the size of the History list:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap General.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser2804. In the Max. History Size field, enter a new maximum size, in kilobytes. NOTE Remember that most Palm OS® handhelds have a limited amount of memory (usually 8 megabytes). Choose a History list size that lets you store at least a few pages, but still leaves room on your handheld for other data and applications. A value of at least 50 kilobytes is recommended.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser281Controlling how Palm Web Browser accesses the InternetBecause some wireless Internet Service Providers (ISPs) charge by the amount of data you download, Palm Web Browser is careful to limit how often it accesses the Internet. If you have a faster or more permanent connection to the Internet (such as a wireless Ethernet attachment), the default settings should work for you. If you have a slower or more expensive Internet connection, you can enable two settings that prevent Palm Web Browser from accessing the Internet unless you approve.To change connection settings:1. Press Function + Menu .2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.3. Tap Connecting.4. Tap the check box next to one of the following options to enable or disable that option:By default, both of these options are disabled (that is, there are no checks in the check boxes).5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Viewing web content with plug-insSome web pages require special Palm OS applications, called plug-ins, to display their contents. Plug-ins are Palm OS applications that you install and that work with Palm Web Browser to display web page content. For instance, a plug-in might help you display a file type that Palm Web Browser doesn’t normally support; another plug-in might retrieve your address from Address Book to help you fill in a form. Finding and installing plug-insIf a web page requires a plug-in, the page is likely to provide a link to let you download the plug-in directly to your handheld. Like other Palm OS applications, the plug-in appears in the Applications Launcher.Plug-ins can only be used by Palm Web Browser. Tapping a plug-in’s icon in the Applications Launcher gives you information about that plug-in.Ask before connecting Palm Web Browser notifies you before it accesses the Internet.Offer old content if available Palm Web Browser displays old pages from its History list instead of retrieving pages from the Internet, even if the old pages are outdated. Old pages display a banner to let you know how old they are.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser282To download and install a plug-in:1. Tap the link to download the plug-in.NOTE If you download a Palm OS application (PRC) or Palm OS database (PDB), Palm OS recognizes the file and installs it. On Palm OS software version 4.0 and later, a dialog box like the following appears: 2. If a confirmation dialog box appears, tap Yes to confirm the download.Uninstalling plug-insUninstall plug-ins in the same way you uninstall other Palm OS applications.To uninstall a plug-in:1. Press Home .2. Press Function + Menu .3. Tap Delete in the App menu. 4. Tap the name of the plug-in you want to delete.5. Tap Delete.A confirmation dialog box appears.6. Tap Yes.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Finding the Palm Web Browser version numberPalm Web Browser may use specialized Palm OS applications to help it display web content. Some of these applications may only be compatible with a particular version of Palm Web Browser.To find the Palm Web Browser version number:1. In Applications Launcher, press Function + Menu .2. Tap Info in the App menu.3. Tap Version.4. Scroll down until you see the item Web. The number next to this item is the Palm Web Browser version number.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Palm Web Browser menus283NOTE The Version list may include other items related to Palm Web Browser, including Web Library, and Web Panel. (You may even see multiple copies of some items.) Ignore these items when determining the Palm Web Browser version number.Palm Web Browser menusPalm Web Browser menus are shown here for your reference, and Palm Web Browser features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.Page menuOptions menuHistory Opens the History list, where you can view the sites you most recently accessed.Info Opens the Web Page Info dialog box enabling you to view the name, URL, and size of the current web page.Bookmark URL Bookmarks the current page.Bigger Text / Smaller Text Increases or reduces the size of the screen text.About Web Browser Shows version information about Palm Web Browser.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser284DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
285CHAPTER 16Using World ClockWorld Clock enables you to view the current time and date in multiple locations and to set an alarm. Use World Clock to do the following:■View the current time and date in three locations.■Open a preferences screen where you can set the time and date for all the applications on your handheld.■Set an alarm.■Set Daylight Saving options.To open World Clock and view the time:1. Press Home .2. Select the World Clock icon .TIP Select on the navigator, and then tap Go to Clock.Setting the primary locationYou can use World Clock to select the Location and Date & Time for the primary location. Keep in mind that the primary Location settings are system date and time and that these settings are used by all the applications on your handheld. The primary Location settings also appear in the Date & Time Preferences screen. Similarly, if you change the settings in the Date & Time Preferences screen, those settings become your system date and time and also appear under the primary Location in World Clock. The primary Location settings also serve as a point of reference for the secondary locations.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock286The following procedures show you how to set the Location and Date & Time from within World Clock. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 18 for details on setting these preferences.To set the Location:1. Tap the primary location pick list.2. Tap the location you want to use as the primary location. The location you select is typically a large city in the same time zone as the one where you live. If an appropriate choice does not appear in the list, see “Adding a location” later in this chapter to create a new location.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To set the date:1. Tap Set Date & Time.2. Tap the Set Date box.3. Tap the arrows or press Right and Left on the navigator to select the current year.4. Tap the current month.5. Tap the current date.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Primary location pick listTap to set dateTap arrows to select yearTap to select monthTap to select dateDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting the primary location287To set the time:1. Tap Set Date & Time.2. Tap the Set Time box.3. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.4. Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change them.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Choosing a different primary locationIf you travel to another location and you want alerts to appear based on local time, you need to change the primary location to update the system time. You may, however, prefer to use the secondary locations to view the local date and time, and leave the primary location set to your home location.To change the primary location:1. Tap the pick list next to the current primary location.2. Select the location you want to use as the new primary location. If the new location is in another time zone, World Clock automatically updates the date and time in all the applications on your handheld.Tap to set timePrimary location pick listDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock288Setting the secondary locationsThe secondary locations display the date and time in two locations other than the primary location. You can use the secondary locations to view the time in places to which you travel or you need to contact people.The date and time in the secondary locations are based on the Date & Time in the primary location.To select the secondary Locations:1. Tap the pick list next to the secondary location.2. Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location. If an appropriate location does not appear in the list, see the next section “Adding a location” to create a new location.Adding a locationIf an appropriate location does not appear in the Location pick list, you can add a new location to the list, and if necessary adjust the time zone and Daylight Saving settings. If you activate the Daylight Saving options, the time change automatically occurs at 1:00 AM on the selected start and end dates.To add a location:1. Tap the Location pick list.2. Select Edit List.3. Tap Add.4. Select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. (Optional) Tap the Name field and modify the Location name.Secondary location pick listDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding a location2897. (Optional) Tap the Time Zone box and select a time zone.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.To set Daylight Saving options:1. From the Edit Location dialog box, tap the This location observes Daylight Saving Time check box to select it.2. Tap the Start box.3. Tap the month when daylight saving begins.4. Tap the Week pick list.5. Select the week when daylight saving begins within the selected month.6. Tap the Day pick list.7. Select the day of the week when daylight saving begins within the selected week.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.9. Tap the End box and repeat steps 3 through 8 to select when daylight saving ends.10. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock290Modifying a LocationIf you add a location and later realize you did not use the correct settings, you can modify the location. To modify a Location:1. Tap a Location pick list.2. Select Edit List.3. Select the location you want to modify.4. Tap Edit.5. Adjust the settings. See “Adding a location” earlier in this chapter for details.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Removing a locationIf you no longer need a location that appears on the Location list, you can remove it from the list. You cannot remove a location that is currently assigned to the primary location.To remove a Location:1. Tap a Location pick list.2. Select Edit List.3. Select the location you want to remove.4. Tap Remove.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm deletion.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Setting an alarmIn addition to setting and displaying the Date & Time, World Clock also provides a convenient travel alarm feature. You can set an alarm to sound during the next 24-hour period.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using World Clock menus291To set an alarm:1. Tap the box next to the Alarm icon to open the Set Alarm dialog box.2. Tap the time columns to set the hour and minute.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.4. When the alarm reminder message appears, do one of the following:– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen.– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in five minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time is displayed in the Reminder bar and the alarm time appears on the screen. 5. Tap Go To to open World Clock.Using World Clock menusWorld Clock menus are shown here for your reference, and World Clock features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock292Options menuDisplay Options Opens a dialog box where you can choose which information appears on the World Clock screen.Show Multiple Locations. Activates the secondary location displays. When it is selected, the secondary locations appear below the primary location. Show Date. Activates the date display. When it is selected, the date appears below the time for each location.Alarm Preferences Sound. Sets the sound of the alarm. The choices are Alarm, Bumble Bee, Reveille, Sonata, Wake Up, and Warbler.Volume. Defines how loud the alarm sounds. The choices are Low, Medium, and High.About World Clock Shows version information for World Clock.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
293CHAPTER 17Performing HotSync® OperationsHotSync® technology enables you to synchronize data between one or more Palm OS® handhelds and Palm™ Desktop software or another PIM such as Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you must connect your handheld and Palm Desktop software. You can synchronize your data by placing your handheld in the cradle/cable attached to your computer or using your wireless local area network (LAN). You can also use infrared communications or a modem.Selecting HotSync setup optionsYou can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, you can adjust the local and modem HotSync settings as well.To set the HotSync options on a Windows computer:1. Click the HotSync icon ™ in the Windows system tray.2. Select Setup.3. Click the General tab and select one of the following options:Always available Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and constantly monitors the communication port for synchronization requests from your handheld. With this option, the HotSync Manager synchronizes data even when Palm Desktop software is not running.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations294If you’re not sure which option to use, keep the default setting: Always available.4. If you are using a serial cradle/cable, click the Local tab to display the settings for the connection between your computer and the handheld cradle/cable, and adjust the following options as needed. If you are using the USB cradle/cable, you do not need to use the settings on the Local tab for a direct HotSync operation. 5. Click the Modem tab to display the modem settings and adjust the options as needed. See “Using File Link” later in this chapter for more information.6. If you are attached to a network, click the Network tab to display the network settings and adjust the options as needed. For more information, see “Conducting network HotSync operations” later in this chapter.7. Click OK.Available only when Palm Desktop softwareis runningStarts HotSync Manager and monitors requests automatically when you open Palm Desktop software.Manual Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager from the Start menu.Serial Port Identifies the port that HotSync Manager uses to communicate with the cradle/cable. You can change the port selection.Your handheld cannot share this port with an internal modem or other device. Speed Determines the speed at which data is transferred between your handheld and Palm Desktop software. Try the As Fast As Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you experience problems. This setting allows Palm Desktop software and your handheld to find and use the fastest speed.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing HotSync application settings295To set the HotSync options on a Mac:1. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.2. Click the HotSync Controls tab and select any of the following options.3. Close the HotSync Software Setup window. Customizing HotSync application settingsFor each application, you can define a set of options that determines how records are handled during synchronization. These options are called a conduit. By default, a HotSync operation synchronizes all files between the handheld and Palm Desktop software. In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only reason you might want to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your handheld or Palm Desktop software, or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of file because you don’t use it.In addition to the conduits for Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Note Pad, Palm Desktop software includes System and Install conduits, as well as conduits for the VersaMailTM application. The System conduit backs up the system information stored on your handheld, including ShortCuts. The Install conduit installs add-on applications on your handheld. The conduit for the VersaMail application enables you to select e-mail accounts to synchronize. The VersaMail application is optional and is not installed on all handhelds.HotSync Enabled/DisabledActivates the HotSync software and prepares your computer to synchronize with your handheld. By default, the transport monitor is enabled whenever you start your computer. Enable HotSync software at system startupActivates the transport monitor automatically each time you start your computer. If this option is not selected, you must open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before you can perform a HotSync operation.Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you perform a HotSync operation.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations296To customize HotSync application settings on a Windows computer:1. Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of the taskbar).You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu bar.2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom.3. Select the appropriate username from the list.4. Select an application in the Conduit list.5. Click Change, and do one of the following:Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set as default box. Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default button in the Custom dialog box.6. Click OK.7. Click Done to activate your settings.To customize HotSync application settings on a Mac computer:1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder.2. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.3. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.4. Select an application in the Conduit list.VersaMail Set synchronization options. Click Configure Accounts to change e-mail account settings. The VersaMail application is optional and is not installed on all handhelds.Other applications For each application, click the direction in which you want to write data, or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting network HotSync operations2975. Click Conduit Settings.6. For each application, click the direction in which you want to write data, or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application.Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations.7. Click OK.8. Close the Conduit Settings window.Conducting network HotSync operationsWhen you use the network HotSync technology, you can take advantage of the LAN and WAN connectivity available in many office environments. Network HotSync technology enables you to perform a network HotSync operation using any one of the following methods:■802.11b radio■Using a cradle/cable that is connected to any computer on your LAN or WAN (provided that the computer connected to the cradle/cable also has the network HotSync technology installed, your computer is on, and the HotSync Manager is running).DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations298Connecting to your computer through a wireless local area network (LAN)A network HotSync operation requires the following (consult your system administrator for assistance):■Your computer has TCP/IP support installed.■Your computer is available on a broadband network, such as a company network or DSL. IMPORTANT Dial-up modem connection is not supported.To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation:1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.2. From the HotSync Manager menu, verify that Network is selected. If Network is selected, there is a check mark next to it. If Network is not selected, click on Network to select.3. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.4. Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a checkmark next to it. If the checkmark is not there, click the check box next to your user name.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting network HotSync operations2995. If your user name does not appear, click New, enter your user name and click OK.6. Click OK.7. Perform one of the following:– Put your handheld in the cradle/cable, and perform a HotSync operation. The HotSync operation records network information about your computer on your handheld. With this information, your handheld can locate your computer when you perform a HotSync operation over the network. You are ready to perform a network HotSync.– Perform a network HotSync operation. You will need to go through a setup procedure on your handheld.Performing a wireless network HotSync operationAfter you prepare your computer and select your Conduit Setup options, you are ready to perform a wireless network HotSync operation. IMPORTANT You must first install the Palm Desktop software that came with your Tungsten C handheld before your attempt a network HotSync operation. Your computer must have the software installed to communicate with your handheld.If you already performed a cradle/cable HotSync operation, you are ready for network HotSync operation with no further preparation needed. If you did not perform a cradle/cable HotSync operation, you must set up from your handheld.To perform a wireless network HotSync operation:1. Press Home .2. Tap the HotSync icon .DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations3003. Tap Network and then tap the HotSync icon.To set up your handheld during the first HotSync operation:1. Press Home .2. Tap the HotSync icon .3. Tap Network and then tap the HotSync icon.4. Tap Next.Tap here to start a network HotSync operationTap NetworkTap here to startTap NetworkTap NextDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations3015. Select your desktop computer and tap Add.6. Tap the HotSync icon .Performing cradle/cable HotSync operationsThe simplest way to synchronize data is to perform a direct HotSync operation by placing your handheld in the cradle/cable and pressing the HotSync button.Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computerThe first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user information on Palm Desktop software. After you enter this information and synchronize, the HotSync Manager recognizes your handheld and doesn’t ask for this information again.If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users, you may want to create a user profile. See “Using File Link” later in this chapter before performing the following steps.IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct connection, or with infrared communication, rather than using a modem or network.Tap NextTap here to start a network HotSync operationDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations302The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop software. If you have not installed this software, see the Palm™ Montana™ Read This First installation guide for instructions.To perform a local HotSync operation on a Windows computer:1. Place your handheld in the cradle/cable.2. If the HotSync Manager is not running, start it: On the Windows desktop, click Start, and then choose Programs. Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group and choose HotSync Manager. Alternatively, you can start the Palm Desktop software, which automatically opens the HotSync Manager. 3. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.IMPORTANT The first time you perform a HotSync operation, you must enter a username in the New User dialog box and click OK. Every handheld should have a unique name. To prevent loss of a user’s records, never try to synchronize more than one handheld to the same username.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations303The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins.4. Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up to remove it.Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computerWhen you installed Palm Desktop software, you entered a username. This username is the connection between your handheld and your computer. The first time you perform a HotSync operation the Palm Desktop software does the following: ■Adds a username to your handheld.■Creates a folder for the username in the Users folder inside the Palm folder inside the current Mac user’s Documents folder. For example, if you entered Jane Garcia as your username, a folder called Jane Garcia is created in the Users folder.■Creates a file named User Data in your username folder. Usernames appear in the User pop-up on the right side of the toolbar. You can change users by selecting a new name in the pop-up menu. Each subsequent time you perform a HotSync operation, HotSync Manager reads the username from your handheld and synchronizes the data in the folder of the same name.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations304Be sure you select the correct username from the User pop-up before entering data on Palm Desktop or performing a HotSync operation.If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users, you may want to create a user profile. See “Creating a user profile” later in this chapter before performing the following steps.IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct connection, or with infrared communication.The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop software. See the Palm™ Montana™ Read This First installation guide if you have not installed this software.To perform a local HotSync operation on a Mac computer:1. Place your handheld in the HotSync cradle/cable.2. Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder. Click the HotSync Controls tab and make sure the Enabled option is selected.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations3053. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.The HotSync Progress dialog box appears, followed by the Select User dialog box.4. In the Select User dialog box, select the username you entered when you installed the Palm Desktop software, and click OK.The HotSync Progress dialog box reappears, and synchronization begins.5. Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up to remove it.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations306Conducting IR HotSync operationsYou can use the infrared (IR) port on your handheld to perform HotSync operations. When you perform an IR HotSync operation, you don't need your cradle/cable. However, you must have a computer that’s equipped with an IR port and that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) standards. This is especially useful if you travel with an infrared-enabled laptop. You simply enable infrared communication on your laptop and handheld and follow the steps in “Performing an IR HotSync operation” later in this section.Preparing your computer for infrared communicationBefore you can perform a HotSync operation using the IR port, the computer with which you want to synchronize must fulfill these requirements:■Your computer must support the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards.■Your computer must have an enabled infrared port that’s built into the computer, or an enabled infrared device attached to the computer. ■Some desktop computers may require an infrared device attached to a physical COM port. Laptops are likely to have a built-in IR port, so no external device is necessary. ■Your computer must have an installed infrared driver.■If you have an external infrared device attached to your computer, a driver is probably included with the device. Consult the documentation included with the device for information on installing the required driver.Check your computer’s documentation to learn if the computer supports infrared communication. To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Windows computer:■Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray, and make sure that Infrared is checked. – If you have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu, and that option is selected, skip to “Performing an IR HotSync operation.”– If you do not have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu, complete the following steps:a. Make sure that Local Serial is selected on the menu.b. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.c. Click the Local tab.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting IR HotSync operations307d. In the Serial Port drop-down box, select the simulated port that your computer uses for infrared communication.See the documentation for your operating system for instructions on finding the simulated port. This information is usually located in the Control Panel.–Click OK.NOTE If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. If your cradle/cable is connected to a serial port, you cannot use your HotSync cradle/cable again until you reconfigure the HotSync Manager to communicate with the port defined for cradle/cable synchronization.To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Mac computer:1. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.2. In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.3. Click the Connection Settings tab.4. Select the On check box next to IR Port.5. Close the HotSync Software Setup window. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations308Performing an IR HotSync operationAfter you complete the steps to prepare for performing an IR HotSync operation, it’s easy to perform the actual operation. To perform an IR HotSync operation:1. Press Home .2. Tap the HotSync icon .3. Tap Local.4. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to PC/Handheld.5. Position the IR port of your handheld within a couple of inches of the infrared port of your computer.6. Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation.Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operationsIt’s easy to return to using the cradle/cable for HotSync operations.If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. Use the following instructions to return to Local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations only when necessary, such as when you have disconnected the cradle/cable from the USB port.To return to local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the USB port of the computer you use for HotSync operations.2. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray, and select Local USB if it is not already selected. Tap here to start IR HotSync operationNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using File Link309To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the port of the computer you use for HotSync operations.2. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.3. Choose Setup, and then click Local.4. Select the COM port where your cradle/cable is connected.5. Click OK.To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Mac computer:1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to a serial port on your computer.2. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.3. In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.4. Click the Connection Settings tab, and select the correct connection.5. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation, just press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable, as you always did before.Using File LinkThe File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad information onto your handheld from a separate external file such as a company phone list. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category on your Palm Desktop software and on your handheld. You can configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation. With File Link you can import data stored in any of the following formats:■Comma-separated (*.csv)■Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)■Address Book archive (*.aba)■Text (*.txt)For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.NOTE The File Link feature is not available in Palm Desktop software for Mac.Creating a user profileA user profile enables you to install the same set of data onto multiple Palm OS handhelds before each handheld is individualized with a specific user name and data file.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations310A handheld that is preconfigured with a user profile can be given to anyone because the handheld is not yet identified by a unique user name. The handheld acquires a unique user name when the new user performs his or her first local HotSync operation.For example, suppose a sales organization wants to distribute two dozen handhelds that each have a common company phone list, a set of memos, and several key applications. A user profile can be created to install the common data before the handhelds are distributed to the employees who will use them. Then when the employees perform their first HotSync operation, the common data becomes part of their individual data file.NOTE The handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new ones that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their user names and data removed by a hard reset.To create a user profile on a Windows computer:1. Open Palm Desktop software.2. From the Tools menu, select Users.3. Click Profiles. 4. Click New.5. Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each profile that you want to create, and then click OK to return to Palm Desktop software. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Creating a user profile3117. Select the profile from the User list, and create the data for the profile (for example, a company phone list).DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations312To create a user profile on a Mac computer:1. Open Palm Desktop software.2. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users.3. Click New Profile.4. Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK.5. Close the Users window.6. From the User pop-up menu, select the new profile.7. Create the data for the profile (such as a company phone list).8. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.9. Select the conduit settings for the profile. See “Customizing HotSync application settings” earlier in this chapter for details.Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profileAfter you create a user profile, you are ready to transfer the information to the new handheld during the first HotSync operation.To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Windows computer:1. Place the new handheld in the cradle/cable.2. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.3. Click Profiles.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Creating a user profile3134. Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK.5. Click Yes to transfer all the profile data to the handheld.The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld.To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Mac computer:1. Connect the new handheld to the HotSync cradle/cable.2. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.3. Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK to transfer all the profile data to the handheld.The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations314DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
315CHAPTER 18Setting Preferences for Your HandheldThe Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration options on your handheld, including the following:General PreferencesDate and Time Set the date, time, time zone, and Daylight Saving switch.Digitizer Calibrate the screen on your handheld.Formats Set the country default and the formats for dates, times, calendar, and numbers.Keyboard Configure your keyboard functions.On-Screen Writing Enable or disable full-screen GraffitiTM writing.Power Set these features: auto shutoff interval, Stay on in cradle, and Beam Receive.Sounds and alerts Set these features: sounds, vibrator, and indicator light.Communication PreferencesConnection Configure cradle, modem, and infrared communication settings.Network For advanced users: Configure your handheld for use with TCP/IP services or with an ISP.VPN Configure your VPN accounts on your handheld.Wi-Fi Turn on the 802.11b radio and set up your Wi-Fi network.Personal PreferencesButtons Reassign different applications to the buttons on the front panel of your handheld, and the HotSync® button on the cradle.Colors Set a color theme for the display.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld316Viewing PreferencesYou can select preferences using the stylus or using the five-way navigator.To open the Preferences screens:1. Press Home . 2. Tap the Preferences icon . 3. Select a functional area and then select the Preferences screen you want to view.4. Scroll down to access any third-party preferences.NOTE This chapter does not describe third-party preferences. See the documentation for the third-party application for information.Owner Assign your name, phone number, and other owner information to your handheld.Security Set the security features for your handheld. ShortCuts Define a list of abbreviations.Need screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Buttons preferences317Buttons preferencesThe Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different applications with the buttons on the front of the handheld. Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.If you assign a different application to a button, you can still access the original application using the Applications Launcher. To change the Buttons preferences:1. Tap the pick list next to the button you want to reassign.2. Select the application that you want to assign to the button.Connection preferencesThe Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings used to connect your handheld to other devices. The screen displays a list of available configurations that are ready to be further defined; the list varies depending on the kind of software you’ve added to your handheld.You can also create custom configurations, which include the following:Tap arrow to show pick listTap Default to restore all of the buttons to their factory settingsPC via Cradle/Cable: A local HotSync connection; the direct connection between your handheld and your desktop computer. Your handheld is connected by its universal connector to the cradle, and the cradle is attached by its cable to a USB port of your desktop computer. (If you are using the optional serial cradle, the cradle attaches by its cable to a serial [COM] port of your computer.)Modem via Universal Connector: A cable connection between your handheld’s universal connector and a modem for dialing in to a modem that is part of your computer or laptop. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld318IR to PC connectionThe following example shows you how to edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection to adjust the communication speed; you can similarly edit other connections or settings or create a custom connection. You can use the IR to PC/Handheld connection to perform a remote IR HotSync operation. To accomplish the HotSync operation, your handheld sends data through its IR port to an IR port in your desktop computer, to synchronize with your Desktop application. To edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection:1. Tap the IR to PC/Handheld connection and tap Edit.2. Tap Details.3. Tap the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed.4. Enter the initialization string supplied by the documentation for the modem attached to your mobile phone, if necessary.PC via Infrared: A connection between the IR port of your handheld and the infrared device of your computer or laptop.Modem via Infrared: A connection between the IR port of your handheld and a modem. The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or some other device containing an IR port. (Some IR phones contain modems.)Need screenshotTap Details DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Date and Time preferences3195. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK again to save the configuration.After you create the configuration, you need to set up the HotSync Manager of your Desktop application and the HotSync application of your handheld to perform a modem HotSync operation. Date and Time preferencesThe Date and Time Preferences screen enables you to set the date, time, time zone, and Daylight Saving option on your handheld.To set the date:1. Tap the Set Date box.2. Tap the arrows to select the current year.3. Select a month.4. Tap the current date.To set the time:1. Tap the Set Time box.2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.3. Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change the numbers.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap to set dateTap arrows to select yearTap or use the navigator to select monthTap to select dateDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld320To set the time zone:1. Tap the Location pick list.2. Select a time zone. When you travel, changing the time zone setting to a new time zone automatically resets the date and time on your handheld, but it does not change the time of appointments set in Date Book.Digitizer preferencesThe Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. This is the same screen that appears when you start your handheld for the first time. You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset, or if your digitizer drifts.Formats preferencesUse the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the display format of the dates, times, and numbers on your handheld. Country defaultThe country default sets date, time, week start day, and number conventions based on geographic regions where you might use your handheld. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, on the other hand, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix.All your handheld applications use the Country default settings. You can, however, customize your own preferences as described in “Time, date, week start, and numbers formats” later in this chapter.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Sounds and Alerts preferences321To set the country default:■Tap the Preset to pick list and select a country.Time, date, week start, and numbers formatsThe Time setting defines the format for the time of day. The time format that you select appears in all applications on your handheld. To select the time, date, week start, and numbers format:1. Tap the Time pick list and select a format. 2. Tap the Date pick list and select a format.3. Tap the Week starts pick list, and select whether you want the first day of the week to be Sunday or Monday. This setting controls the Day, Week, and Month views in Date Book and all other aspects of your handheld that display a calendar.4. Tap the Numbers pick list, and select formats for the decimal point and thousands separator.Sounds and Alerts preferencesThe Sounds and Alerts preferences screen enables you to set the alarm options and sounds for your handheld. Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld322System, alarm, and game soundsYour handheld uses a variety of sounds. The System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings enable you to turn the sounds on or off, and to adjust the volume level.To set the system and alarm sounds:1. Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level. IMPORTANT When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the “chime” tones associated with the HotSync operation. 2. Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level. 3. Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level.The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to respond to this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting. Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settingsYou can set alarms in Date Book, Note Pad and World Clock to remind you of important meetings or notes. When you enable the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings, your handheld vibrates and the indicator light blinks to notify you of alarms. This is useful whenever you want to turn the Alarm Sound off but still be notified of alarms.To set the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings:1. Tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off.2. Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off.Keyboard PreferencesThe Keyboard Preferences screen enables you to customize the keyboard. You can set how each key responds when pressed or held. You can also remap the character or function of the key.Any changes you make in the Keyboard Preferences screen become effective immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Keyboard Preferences323To set the key repeat rate:■Move the slider or tap the adjustment bar.To set key clicking:■Tap check box to enable or disable key clicking.To set key press-and-hold functionality:■Tap the Press and hold key pick list, and select the function.Remapping keysKeys can be remapped from their default function to any of the keys or buttons available on the handheld, including the Function keys. Move the sliderTap the adjustment barTap check boxTap pick list and select functionDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld324To remap a key:1. Tap Remap keys.2. Tap a key.3. Tap Remap.You can chose to remap the key and the Function + key combination. 4. Tap Save.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.Tap a keyMapping functionTap to remap Function + key combinationTap to remap keyTap pick list and select keyboardTap characterDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences325Network preferencesCAUTION Network preference settings are for advanced users only. Changing your Network preferences settings affects you handheld’s ability operate in a wireless environment. Use the Wi-Fi preference settings to change your network settings. See “Wi-Fi preferences” later in this chapter.Your handheld supports 802.11b data connections and acts as a fully functional data modem for circuit-switched connections over GSM. Modem Accessory and TCP/IP softwareAlthough your handheld is wirelessly enabled, you can also use TCP/IP software that is included in the handheld operating system to connect with Internet Service Providers (ISPs) or dial-in (remote access) servers. To use TCP/IP, you must create a configuration in Connection Preferences and then create Network Preferences settings. The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define several ways that your handheld can use a modem to communicate with remote devices. For example, you can communicate with the service provider server, or with your computer if you are traveling. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this chapter for a complete explanation of how to create modem configurations.After you configure both the Connection and Network Preferences, you can establish a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection with your service provider or dial-in server. You can do this either by using menu commands from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party application. NOTE TCP/IP provides the ability to connect to your service provider or dial-in server with applications that allow you to view the transmitted data. Visit the web site www.palm.com/support/intl for information on third-party applications that take advantage of TCP/IP.Selecting a serviceUse the Service setting to select the service template for your service provider or a dial-in server. Service templates are a set of service provider and dial-in server configuration settings that you can create, save, and reuse. Also, you can create new service templates. See “Creating additional service templates” later in this chapter.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld326To select a service:1. Tap the Service pick list.2. Select the predefined service template you want to use.Entering a usernameThe User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log in to your service provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain multiple lines of text, only two lines appear onscreen.To enter a username:1. Tap the User Name field. 2. Enter your username.NOTE Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the username.Entering a passwordThe Password box identifies the password you use to log in to your server or service provider. Your entry in this field determines whether your handheld prompts you to enter a password each time you log in to your network:■If you do not enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Prompt” in this field and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure. ■If you enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Assigned” in this field and does not prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure.Tap here to display a list of service templatesEnter your username hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences327If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do not enter a password.To enter a password:1. Tap the Password box.2. Enter the password you use to log in to your server..3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”Selecting a connectionUse the Connection setting to select the method you want to use to connect to your service provider or a dial-in server. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this chapter for information about creating and configuring connection settings.To select a connection:1. Tap the Connection pick list.2. Select the connection you want to use.Adding telephone settingsSome services require a telephone number. When you select the Phone field, a dialog box opens in which you define the telephone number you use to connect Enter password hereTap hereTap here to display a list of available connectionsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld328with your service provider or dial-in server. In addition, you can define a prefix, disable call waiting, and give special instructions for using a calling card.To enter your server phone number:1. Tap the Phone field.2. Enter the phone number for your service provider or dial-in server.3. If you need to enter a prefix or disable call waiting, skip to those procedures. Otherwise, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Entering a prefixA prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line. For example, many offices require that you dial “9” before dialing a number outside the building.To enter a prefix:1. Tap the Dial prefix check box to select it.2. Enter the prefix. 3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Disabling call waitingCall waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are connected. If your telephone has call waiting, you need to disable this feature before logging in to your service provider or dial-in server.Enter the phone number hereEnter your prefix hereSelect this box if you need to use a prefixDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences329To disable call waiting:1. Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it.2. Enter the code to disable call waiting on the Disable call waiting line.Each telephone company assigns a code to disable call waiting. Contact your local telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Using a calling cardThe Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your service provider or Intranet server. Keep in mind that there is usually a delay before you enter your calling card number. When you define your calling card number, you need to add commas at the beginning to compensate for this delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds.To use a calling card:1. Tap the Use calling card check box to select it.2. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line.NOTE The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long-distance services. However, because MCI works differently, MCI customers need to put the calling card number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field.TIP It’s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card number to compensate for the cue delay.Enter your disable code hereSelect this box if you need to disable call waitingEnter your calling card number hereSelect this box to use a calling cardDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3303. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Connecting to your serviceAfter you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your service provider or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.To establish a connection:■Tap Connect to dial the current service and display the Service Connection Progress messages. To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the lower half of the Scroll button.To close a connection:■Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your handheld and your service.Creating additional service templatesYou can create additional service templates from scratch, or you can duplicate existing templates and editing information. After you create a new or duplicate template, you can add and edit settings.To add a new service template:■Press Command Stroke + N.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select New on the Service Menu.An Untitled service template is added to the Service pick list.To duplicate an existing service template:1. Tap the Service pick list.2. Select the predefined service template you want to duplicate.3. Press Command Stroke + L.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Duplicate on the Service Menu.A copy of the service template is added to the Service pick list.Adding detailed information to a service templateIf you are using one of the predefined service templates, you probably need to enter only your username and telephone number. If you are creating a new service template, you may need to provide additional information to your service provider or dial-in server. You use the Details dialog box to add more information to a selected service template.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences331To add connection details:1. Tap the service field.2. Tap Details.Idle timeout The Idle timeout setting defines how long your handheld waits before dropping the connection with your service provider or dial-in server when you switch out of a TCP/IP application.To set the Idle timeout:1. Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options:2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Selecting Next ServiceNext Service allows you to automatically try another connection method when the primary method fails. If the current connection fails, then a connection to the selected service is attempted. If you do not want to try another service connection, select None.To select the Next Service:■Tap the Next Service pick list and select a service.1 minute Waits one minute for you to open another application before it drops the connection. 2 minutes Waits two minutes. 3 minutes Waits three minutes. Never Maintains your PPP or SLIP connection until you turn off your handheld (or until it times out). CAUTION By enabling this option, you may incur significant charges if the connection to your service provider is left open.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld332Defining primary and secondary DNSThe Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating the names of host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or IP address) you are identifying a specific server that handles the translation services.Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details dialog box, you enter each section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a number from 0 to 255; numbers are the only allowable characters in this field.Ask your service provider or system administrator for the correct primary or secondary DNS IP numbers.Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS. If you are not sure, leave the DNS field blank.To enter a primary and secondary DNS:1. Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it.2. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, and then enter the first section of the IP address. Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.3. Repeat step 2 for the second, third, and last sections of the Primary DNS field.4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary DNS number.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.IP address Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP address), whether permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address when clients log in. The IP Address field lets you identify whether your network provides automatic (dynamic) temporary IP addressing.If your IP address is permanently assigned, you need to get that information from your system administrator. If you are not sure, select Automatic.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences333To identify dynamic IP addressing:■Tap the IP Address check box to select it.To enter a permanent IP address:1. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent IP address field below the check box.2. Tap the space to the left of the first period, and then enter the first section of the IP address. Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.3. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Login scripts A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server—for example, your corporate network or your wireless service provider. A login script is associated with a specific service template created in Network Preferences.A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if your company has a system in which you log in to the corporate servers from your handheld using a modem or network connection. The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It automates the events that must take place in order to establish a connection between your handheld and the corporate servers.Tap to select automatic IP addressDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld334You can create login scripts from the Login Script dialog box on your handheld, accessed from the Details dialog box in Network Preferences.NOTE You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login script.Creating a login script on your handheldYou can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional information. Those commands have a parameter field so that you can add the necessary data.To create a login script:1. Tap Script.2. Tap the End pick list.3. Select the command you want from the Command list. If the command requires additional information, a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the information. The following commands are available:Tap here to see the list of available commandsWait For Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the TCP/IP server before executing the next command.Tap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences3354. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Plug-in applicationsYou can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC application that you install on your handheld just like any other application. After you install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in a login script. Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:■Written in C language ■Compiled into a device executable■Called properly from a login script■Able to return control to a login script after it terminatesWait For Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value. You then enter the challenge value into your token card, which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your handheld. This command takes two arguments, separated by a vertical bar (|) on the input line.Send Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you are connecting.Send CR Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server to which you are connecting.Send User ID Transmits the user ID information entered in the User ID field of the Network Preferences screen.Send Password Transmits the password entered in the Password field of the Network Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command.Delay Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before executing the next command in the login script.Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld. This command is used with SLIP connections.Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter text of some kind (for example, a password or a security code).End Identifies the last line in the login script.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld336■Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software, such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior for Palm Platform. For additional information on creating plug-in applications, send e-mail to Palm Developer Support at devsupp@palm.com.Deleting a service templateThere is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete command from the Service menu.To delete a service template:1. Tap the Service pick list.2. Select the service template you want to delete.3. Press Command Stroke + D.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Delete on the Service Menu.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Network preferences menu commandsThe Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to create and edit service templates. See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for more information about choosing menu commands.Service menuOptions menuView LogThe Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs between your modem and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the Network Log can help your service provider or your system administrator pinpoint where the login procedure communication fails and why.On-Screen Writing preferencesPalm On-screen Writing offers you the option of using the full screen to enter text. You can enter Graffiti characters anywhere on the screen using the same stroke used within the Graffiti silkscreen region. Letters are written on the left side of the DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
On-Screen Writing preferences337screen and numbers are written on the right side of the screen. On screen controls can still be accessed by tapping and holding the control until it activates.IMPORTANT See “Using Graffiti writing to enter data” in Chapter 3 for instructions on using Palm On-screen Writing. Enabling Palm On-screen WritingPalm On-screen Writing can be enabled and disabled from the preferences screen or from the edit menu within an application. For information on using the edit menu option, see “Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen Writing” in Chapter 4. To use on-screen controls, tap and hold the control until the control is activates.To enable or disable Palm On-screen Writing:■Tap the On or Off button.Displaying penstrokesYou have the option to have the penstroke display as you are writing the Graffiti character.1. Tap the On button to display the Show penstrokes check box.Need screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3382. Tap the Show penstrokes check box to enable or disable.Owner preferencesThe Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name, phone number, or any other information that you want to associate with your handheld. This information can be from the business card created during installation.If you use the Security Preferences screen to turn off and lock your handheld with a password, information that you put in the Owner Preferences is displayed the next time you turn on your handheld.To enter the Owner preferences:■Enter the text that you want to associate with your handheld in the Owner Preferences screen. If you enter more text than can fit on one screen, a scroll bar automatically appears on the right side of the screen.If you assign a password with the Security Preferences screen, the information in the Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button appears at the bottom of the screen. To unlock the Owner Preferences screen:1. Tap Unlock.2. Enter the password that you defined in the Security Preferences screen.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Power preferences339Power preferencesThe Power preferences screen enables you to set the auto shutoff interval, and the Beam Receive feature. Auto-off delayYour handheld has an automatic shutoff feature that activates after a period of inactivity. This feature turns off the power and backlight but leaves the radio on. This feature helps conserve battery power in case you forget to turn off your handheld. If you find that your handheld shuts itself off before you finish reviewing the information on the screen, you should increase the time setting of the automatic shutoff feature.To set the Auto-off delay:1. Tap the Auto-off After pick list. 2. Select the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. Cradle settingsYou can choose to leave your handheld on when it is in the cradle during a HotSync operation, or when you are recharging the battery, so you can continue to view your data.To change the cradle setting:■Tap the Stay on in Cradle check box to leave your handheld on when it is in the cradle. Beam ReceiveYou can choose to turn off the Beam Receive feature. This prohibits anyone from beaming information to your handheld. It also results in a slight saving of battery power.To change the Beam Receive setting:■Tap the Beam Receive pick list and select On or Off.Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld340Security preferencesYour handheld comes with a Security feature so that unauthorized users cannot view the entries you wish to protect. Use the Security feature to do the following:■Lock and turn off your handheld so that it does not operate until you enter the correct password.■Mask all records that you mark as private so the information appears grayed out. ■Hide all records that you mark as private so they do not appear on any screen. ■Encrypt records.You can mask and hide private records with or without a password. Without a password, private records are hidden or masked until you set the Security preference to show them. With a password, you must enter the password to view the private entries. Assigning a passwordYou can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock your handheld. To quickly logon, you can also assign a short quick password that only works at your first logon attempt.To assign a password:1. Tap the Password box.2. Enter a password. 3. Enter a hint to help your remember your password if you forget it. This is optional.4. Enter a quick password. This is optional.5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.6. Enter the same password a second time, and press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap here Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences341Changing or deleting a passwordOnce you define a password for your handheld, you can change or delete it at any time. You must enter the current password before you can change or delete it.To change or delete your password:1. Tap the Password box.2. Enter the current password. 3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.4. Do one of the following:– To change the password, hint, or quick password, enter the new information, and press Function + Enter , or tap OK.– To remove the password, tap Unassign.Locking your handheldYou can lock your handheld so that it cannot be operated until your password is entered. In the event that your handheld is lost or stolen, this helps protect your data from unauthorized use. You can set your handheld to lock automatically, or you can lock it manually.Locking your handheld automaticallyYou can set your handheld to lock automatically when any one of the following occur: Tap hereNeed screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld342■When you turn off the power■At a time you specify■After a period of inactivity you specifyTo set your handheld to lock when you turn it off:1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.2. Enter your password.3. Select On power off.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To set your handheld to lock at a preset time:1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.Tap hereTap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences3432. Enter your password.3. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To set your handheld to lock after a period of inactivity:1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.2. Enter your password.3. Select After a preset delay.4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap hereTap to select Minutes or HoursEnter the amount of timeDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld344IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld, you must enter the exact password to reactivate your handheld. If you forget the password, your handheld will present the hint you have entered to help you remember the password. If you still cannot remember the password, you must perform a hard reset to resume using your handheld. Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your handheld; however, you can restore all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation. See “Performing a hard reset” in Appendix A for more information.Locking your handheld manuallyYou can turn off and lock your handheld manually. When the handheld is locked, you can only make emergency calls by pressing the four application buttons simultaneously.To lock and turn off your handheld:1. Tap Lock & Turn Off.2. To use your handheld, turn it on and then enter the password. Recovering from a forgotten passwordIMPORTANT Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries and files marked as Private.If you forget your password, your handheld displays the password hint, if you entered one, to help you remember the password. If you are still unable to remember the password, you can delete it from your handheld. IMPORTANT If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a forgotten password, your handheld restores your private entries the next time you perform a HotSync operation, but it does not restore the password.Tap Lock and Turn OffDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences345To delete a forgotten password:1. Tap the Password box.2. Tap Lost Password. 3. Tap Delete Password.Making records privateIn many applications, you can make individual records private. Private records remain visible and accessible, however, until you select the Security setting to hide or mask all private records. Masked records appear as grey placeholders in the same position they would appear if they were not masked, and are marked with a lock icon. Hidden records disappear completely from the screen. If you define a password for your handheld, you must enter it to display private records.Tap hereTap hereNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld346To hide all private records:1. Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Hide Records..2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm that you want to hide private records. To mask all private records:1. Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Mask Records.2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm that you want to mask private records. Tap Hide Records Need screenshotTap Mask RecordsNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences347To display all private records:1. Do one of the following:– Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.– If you do not have a password, hidden and masked records become visible. If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to step 2.2. Enter your password.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Hiding your records automaticallyYou can set your handheld to automatically hide records when any one of the following occur: ■When you turn off the power■At a time you specify■After a period of inactivity you specifyTo hide your records when you turn your handheld off:1. Select Automatic.Select Show RecordsNeed screenshotSelect AutomaticNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3482. Enter your password.3. Select On power off.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To automatically hide records at a preset time:1. Select Automatic.2. Enter your password.3. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Need screenshotSelect AutomaticNeed screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences349To automatically hide your records after a period of inactivity:1. Select Automatic.2. Enter your password.3. Select After a preset delay.4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Masking your records automaticallyYou can set your handheld to automatically mask records when any one of the following occur: ■When you turn off the power■At a time you specify■After a period of inactivity you specifySelect AutomaticNeed screenshotTap to select Minutes or HoursEnter the amount of timeNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld350To mask your records when you turn your handheld off:1. Select Automatic.2. Enter your password.3. Select On power off.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To automatically mask records at a preset time:1. Select Automatic.2. Enter your password.Select AutomaticNeed screenshotNeed screenshotSelect AutomaticNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences3513. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To automatically mask records after a period of inactivity:1. Select Automatic.2. Enter your password.3. Select After a preset delay.4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list. 5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Need screenshotSelect AutomaticNeed screenshotTap to select Minutes or HoursEnter the amount of timeNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld352To unmask individual records:1. Select a masked record.2. Do one of the following:– If you do not have a password, a masked record becomes visible. – If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to step 3.3. Enter your password.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To make a record private:1. Display the entry that you want to make private. 2. Tap Details. 3. Tap the Private check box.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Setting security optionsYou can set security options that allow you to further customize how your handheld handles security features. Masking your password entryMasking your password entry secures your password against accidental viewing by another person. The password only shows asterisks.To mask your password entry:1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.2. Tap the check box for Mask password entry3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Tap hereNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences353Setting the quick password delay time limitYou can set quick password delay time limit to accommodate your personal preference. After the delay limit has been reached, you must enter the full password. For more information about the quick password, see “Changing or deleting a password” earlier in this chapter.To set the quick password delay time limit:1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.2. Tap the check box for Quick password delay time limit.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Encrypting your dataYou can encrypt selected data whenever your handheld locks. The more applications and data that is selected, the longer it takes to encrypt.To encrypt your data when the handheld locks:1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.2. Tap the Options pick list and select Encryption.3. Tap the check box for Encrypt data when locked.4. Tap Choose Applications button.Tap hereEnter delay time limitNeed screenshotTap pick list and select EncryptionNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3545. Select the applications whose data you want to encrypt.6. If you want to encrypt only private records, select Encrypt private records only.7. Tap the Encryption type pick list and select a type.8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Using security shortcutsYou can create shortcuts to activate certain security features, such as locking the handheld or masking private records. To activate the shortcuts, press Function + ShortCut + shortcut key.To create and activate security shortcuts:1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.2. Tap the check box for the security shortcut you want to activate.Need screenshotTap pick list and select typeNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ShortCuts preferences3553. If you want to change the current character, tap and drag the stylus to select the character and type in new character.ShortCuts preferencesThe ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering text. This section describes how to create, edit, and delete a ShortCut. Creating a ShortCutYou can create a ShortCut for any words, letters, or numbers. All ShortCuts you create appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are available in any of your handheld applications and are backed up on your computer when you perform a HotSync operation.To create a ShortCut:1. Tap New.2. On the ShortCut Name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the ShortCut.3. Select the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when you write the ShortCut characters.TIP You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.Tap to select applicationChange the shortcut keyNeed screenshotTap NewDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3564. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.To use a ShortCut, press Press Function + ShortCut followed by the ShortCut characters. The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.Editing a ShortCutAfter you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.To edit a ShortCut:1. Tap the ShortCut you want to edit.2. Tap Edit.3. Make the changes you want.4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.Deleting a ShortCutIf you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.To delete a ShortCut:1. Tap the ShortCut you want to delete.2. Tap Delete.3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Yes.VPN preferencesThe VPN Preferences enables you to configure your VPN account, and connect and disconnect to your account. This section describes how to configure an account and connect to your account. ShortCut symbolDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
VPN preferences357Connecting to your VPN accountYou can connect to your VPN account from the preferences screen or from the application.To connect to your VPN account:1. Tap the Connect button.2. Enter your password if you have chosen not to store the password for the account.3. Tap the Disconnect button when you are finished accessing the account.Tap hereNeed screenshotEnter password if you have chosen not to store it on the handheldNeed screenshotTap here Need screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld358Configuring your VPN accountYou can set up and edit your VPN account. You can also manually edit a TCP/IP connection.To set up your VPN account:1. Tap the Account button to begin the setup wizard.2. Fill out the information required by each screen.To edit your VPN account or add a new account:1. Tap the Account button and select Edit Accounts.2. Select the account and tap Add or Edit.Tap hereNeed screenshotSelect Edit Accounts Need screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences3593. Tap Next.4. Perform one of the following:– Add or edit the information on the screens. – Tap Advanced to edit encryption setting and TCP/IP addresses.Wi-Fi preferencesWi-Fi preferences allows you to configure your 802.11b network settings and view network status.Turning the 802.11b radio on and offThe Wi-Fi preferences screen allows you to turn the 802.11b radio on and off. It also indicates what network you are connected to and if you are out of range. NOTE If the Signal indicates that there are no networks within range, the 802.11b radio continues to check for a network until you turn the radio off. If you move to an area that is within range and the radio is on, Wi-Fi automatically connects.To turn on or off the 802.11b radio:■Tap Wi-Fi pick list and select On or Off.Tap hereNeed screenshotNeed screenshotTap pick list and select OnDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld360Finding Wi-Fi connection informationYour IT administrator may need your MAC address. The Wi-Fi Info screen shows you the address and other Wi-Fi information.To view Wi-Fi information:■Tap Info.The Wi-Fi Info screen only shows the MAC address when you are disconnected.Conserving battery powerYou can extend your battery power by selecting the Conserve power option. This option dynamically adjusts the coverage area and polling rate to use less power.To conserve battery power:■Tap Conserve power.Adding and editing a Wi-Fi connectionYou can add a new Wi-Fi network connection or edit an existing connection. The connections can be a infrastructure access point type connection, such as network Tap hereTap hereDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences361connections found on company sites, or the connection can be a peer-to-peer or ad-hoc connection, such as a laptop that acts as an access point for your handheld.To add or edit an infrastructure access point Wi-Fi network:1. Tap Wi-Fi in the Preferences main screen.2. Tap the Network pick list and select Edit Network.3. Perform one of the following:– Select a network and tap Edit.–Tap Add4. Edit or add the information.5. Perform one of the following:Select Edit NetworkNeed screenshotNeed screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld362– Tap OK if you want the IP and DNS addresses automatically retrieved or you do not want to change the IP or DNS addresses. – Tap Details to manually set your IP or DNS addresses.6. Tap Advanced.7. Tap the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and select manual.8. Add the addresses and tap OK.You can also chose to use a short preamble by checking the Use short preamble check box.Tap AdvancedNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences363To add or edit a peer-to-peer (ad-hoc) Wi-Fi network:1. Tap Wi-Fi in the Preferences main screen.2. Tap the Network pick list and select Edit Network.3. Perform one of the following:– Select a network and tap Edit.–Tap Add4. Edit or add the information.5. Tap Details.Select Edit NetworkNeed screenshotNeed screenshotNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld3646. Tap the connection type pick list and select Peer-to-peer (ad-hoc).7. Tap the Channel pick list and select the channel number.8. Perform one of the following:– Tap OK if you want the IP and DNS addresses automatically retrieved. – Tap Advanced to manually set your IP or DNS addresses.9. Tap the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and select manual.10. Add the addresses and tap OK.Tap AdvancedNeed screenshotDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences365You can also chose to use a short preamble by checking the Use short preamble check box.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld366DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
367APPENDIX AMaintaining Your HandheldThis appendix provides information on the following:■Proper care of your handheld■Prolonging battery life■Resetting your handheld■Removing and installing your SIM cardCaring for your handheldYour handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of trouble-free service. Please observe the following general tips when using your handheld:■Take care not to scratch the screen of your handheld. Keep the screen clean. When working with your handheld, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a touch-sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the handheld screen.■Your handheld is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or moisture. Under extreme conditions, water may enter the circuitry through the front panel buttons. In general, treat your handheld as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument.■Take care not to drop your handheld or subject it to any strong impact. Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket: if you sit on it, you may damage it.■Protect your handheld from temperature extremes. For example, do not leave your handheld on the dashboard of a car on a hot day or on a day when temperatures are below freezing, and keep it away from heaters and other heat sources.■Do not store or use your handheld in any location that is extremely dusty, damp, or wet.■Use a soft, damp cloth to clean your handheld. If the surface of the handheld screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld368Battery considerationsPlease note the following considerations for the battery in your handheld:■Under normal conditions, you can keep your handheld battery charged by placing it in the cradle between 30 and 60 minutes each day. You can conserve battery life by changing the Auto-off setting that automatically turns the handheld off after a period of inactivity and by selecting the Conserve Power option in Wi-Fi preferences. See “Auto-off delay” in Chapter 18 and see “Wi-Fi preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.■If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert appears on the handheld screen describing the low battery condition. If this alert appears, perform a HotSync® operation to back up your data; then leave your handheld in the cradle to recharge the unit. This helps prevent accidental data loss.■If the battery becomes too low, the wireless operations are disabled to save battery strength.■If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not operate, it stores your data safely for about five days. In this case, there is enough residual energy in the battery to store the data, but not enough to turn on your handheld. If your handheld does not turn on when you press the power button, you should recharge the unit immediately. The battery may not have enough residual energy to power the indicator light, which normally displays green when charging.■If your battery drains and you have the unit in an uncharged state for an extended period of time, you can lose all of the stored data. ■There are no serviceable parts inside your handheld, so do not attempt to open the unit. ■If you ever dispose of your handheld, please dispose of it without damaging the environment. Take your handheld to your nearest environmental recycling center.Resetting your handheldUnder normal circumstances, you will not have to use the reset button. On rare occasions, however, your handheld may no longer respond to buttons or the screen. In this case, you need to perform a reset to get your handheld running again.Performing a soft resetA soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it’s doing and start over again. All records and entries stored in your handheld are retained with a soft reset. After a soft reset, the Welcome screen appears, followed by the Date and Time Preferences screen (to set date and time). DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Resetting your handheld369To perform a soft reset:■Use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip), to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld.TIP The metal and plastic stylus that comes with your handheld has a reset tip inside. To use it, unscrew the barrel from the stylus quill.Performing a hard resetWith a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased. Never perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem. NOTE You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during the next HotSync operation.To perform a hard reset:1. Hold down the power button on the front panel of the handheld.2. While holding down the power button, use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip), to gently press and release the reset button.3. Wait for the Palm Powered™ logo to appear; then release the power button.4. When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to erase all the data stored on your handheld, do one of the following:– Press Up on the navigator to complete the hard reset and display the Digitizer screen.– Press any application button to perform a soft reset. (Pressing a keyboard key has no effect.)NOTE With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default settings.Reset buttonDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld370To restore your data from a Windows computer after a hard reset:1. Click the HotSync icon ™ in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of the taskbar).You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm™ Desktop software menu bar.2. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Custom.3. Select the appropriate username from the list.4. Select an application in the Conduit list.5. Click Change, and select Desktop overwrites the handheld.Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set As Default box. Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default button in the Custom dialog box.6. Click OK.7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications.8. Click Done to activate your settings.9. Perform a HotSync operation.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Resetting your handheld371To restore your data from a Mac computer after a hard reset:1. Double-click the HotSync Manager in the Palm folder.2. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.3. From the Users pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.4. Select an application from the list.5. Click Conduit Settings.6. Click Macintosh overwrites handheld.NOTE Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations.7. Click OK.8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.9. Close the Conduit Settings window.10. Perform a HotSync operation.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld372DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
373APPENDIX BFrequently Asked QuestionsIf you encounter a problem with your handheld, do not call technical support until you have reviewed the following list of frequently asked questions and you have also reviewed the following:■This handbook■The Palm™ Montana™ Read This First that came with your handheld■The README file located in the folder where you installed the Palm™ Desktop software on your Windows computer or on your installation CD for Macintosh users ■The Palm Desktop online Help■The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD■The Palm Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palm.com/support/ under the Support section■The most recent Tungsten C handheld HelpNotes on your regional web siteIf you are still having problems, contact Technical Support. See the Customer Support card that comes with your handheld, or go to www.palm.com/support/.NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for Palm OS® handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large number of third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a third-party application, please contact the developer or publisher of that software.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions374Software installation problemsProblem SolutionThe Palm Desktop Installer Menu did not appear when I inserted the CD-ROM into my Windows computer.1. Click the Start button.2. Choose Run from the Start menu.3. Click Browse.4. Locate your CD-ROM drive and select the autorun.exe file. 5. Click Open.6. Click OK.I cannot install Palm Desktop software on my Windows computer.Try the following:1. Disable any virus scanning software on your computer.2. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE and end all tasks except Systray and Explorer.If a dialog box with buttons appears instead of a list of tasks, click the Task List button and then end all tasks except Systray and Explorer.3. Make sure your computer has at least 30MB of disk space available.4. Delete all temporary files.5. Run ScanDisk on your computer.6. Reinstall Palm Desktop software.I cannot install Palm Desktop software on a Mac computer. Try the following:1. Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.2. Quit any open applications.3. Make sure your computer has at least 25MB of disk space available.4. Reinstall Palm Desktop software.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Operating problems375Operating problemsProblem SolutionI don’t see anything on my handheld’s screen. Try each of these in turn:■Press an application button to ensure your handheld is turned on.■Press Function + Brightness . If the Brightness dialog box appears, adjust the brightness by holding down the up scroll button for a few seconds. If this doesn’t work, hold the down scroll button for a few seconds.■If your handheld was exposed to cold, make sure it is at room temperature.■Recharge the unit.■Perform a soft reset. If your handheld still doesn’t turn on, perform a hard reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in Appendix A.IMPORTANT With a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased. Never perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem. You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during the next HotSync® operation.My battery doesn’t charge. ■Make sure the power outlet is active and the HotSync cradle is properly plugged in.■If the battery does not hold a charge, return your handheld to an authorized Palm service center.I get a warning message telling me my handheld memory is full.■Purge records from Date Book and To Do List. This deletes To Do List items and past Date Book events from the memory of your handheld. See “Purging records” in Chapter 4. You may need to perform a HotSync operation to recover the memory.■Delete unused memos and records. If necessary, you can save these records. See “Deleting records” in Chapter 4.■If you have installed additional applications on your handheld, remove them to recover memory. See “Removing applications” in Chapter 4. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions376Tapping and writing problemsMy handheld keeps turning itself off. Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set at one, two, or three minutes. Check the Auto-off setting. See “Auto-off delay” in Chapter 18.My handheld is not making any sounds. Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings. See “System, alarm, and game sounds” in Chapter 18.My handheld’s indicator light is not blinking when alarms occur.Check the Alarm LED setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings” in Chapter 18.My handheld does not vibrate when alarms occur. Check the Alarm Vibrate setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings” in Chapter 18.My handheld has frozen. Perform a soft reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in Appendix A.My handheld appears to freeze when I place it near my computer.Move your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port.Problem SolutionWhen I tap the buttons or screen icons, my handheld activates the wrong feature. Calibrate the screen. See “Digitizer preferences” in Chapter 18.When I tap the buttons, nothing happens. If you have enabled Palm On-screen Writing, you need to tap and hold the button or other on-screen control until it activates. This delay keeps the handheld activating a control while you are writing a Graffiti character.When I press Function + Menu , or tap the Menu bar nothing happens.Not all applications or screens have menus. Try changing to a different application.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Application problems377Application problemsI can’t get my handheld to recognize my handwriting. ■Make sure you have turned on Palm On-screen Writing. See “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18.■For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the stylus, you need to use Graffiti writing. See “Using Graffiti writing to enter data” in Chapter 3.■Write Graffiti strokes for letters in the left side and the strokes for numbers in the right side of the screen.■Make sure that Graffiti is not shifted into extended or punctuation modes. See “Using Graffiti writing to enter data” in Chapter 3.■See “Graffiti tips” in Chapter 3 for tips on increasing your accuracy when you write Graffiti characters.Problem SolutionI tapped the Today button, but it does not show the correct date.Your handheld is not set to the current date. Make sure the Set Date box in the Date and Time Preferences screen displays the current date. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.I know I entered some records, but they do not appear in the application.■Check the Categories pick list (upper-right corner). Choose All to display all of the records for the application.■Check Security and confirm that Private Records is set to Show private records.■In To Do List, tap Show and see if Show Only Due Items is selected.I am having problems listing memos the way I want to see them.■If you cannot manually arrange the order of the memos in the list screen, check the Memo Preferences setting. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.■If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then perform a HotSync operation, the memos on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions378HotSync problemsI created an event in Date Book, but it doesn’t appear in the Week View.In the Week View, you cannot select overlapping events that have the same start time. If you have two or more events with the same start time, choose the Day View to see the overlapping events.My vCard or vCal e-mail attachment isn’t forwarding correctly.Palm Desktop software provides several features that interact with e-mail client software on a Windows computer. In order for these features to work correctly, the e-mail client software must be properly configured. Follow these steps to check the configuration:1. Click the Windows Start menu, and then select Settings.2. Select Control Panel.3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.4. Make sure that the E-mail field is set to the correct E-Mail client software. 5. Click OK.6. Start the e-mail client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the documentation for your desktop E-Mail application for more information.Problem SolutionI cannot perform a HotSync operation; what should I check to make sure I am doing it correctly?Make sure the HotSync cradle is connected securely.On a Windows computer try these steps:■Check the Windows system tray to make sure the HotSync Manager is running. If it is not, open Palm Desktop software.■Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box. It should be set to the port where you connected the HotSync cradle.On a Mac computer, try the following:■Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled. If it is not, double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and enable HotSync Manager on the HotSync Controls tab.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
HotSync problems379I performed a HotSync operation, but one of my applications did not synchronize.■On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Check that the correct conduit is active. ■On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and check that the correct conduit is active. I am using Outlook as my PIM, but I cannot do a HotSync operation.■Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Check that the correct conduit is active.■Check that the correct conduit is installed. Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure the correct conduit is selected.I cannot launch the HotSync Manager. ■If you are using the optional serial cradle, or if you are performing a HotSync operation using a modem, make sure you are not running another program, such as America Online, that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.■Back up the Palm Desktop software, uninstall it, and then reinstall it.I tried to perform a local HotSync operation, but it did not complete successfully.■Make sure your handheld is seated in the cradle correctly.■Check the connection between the HotSync cradle and the USB or serial port on your computer.■Make sure the username you selected in Palm Desktop software matches the username assigned to your handheld.■Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on your handheld. ■Read the HotSync Log for the user account for which you are performing a HotSync operation.On a Windows computer, try each step in turn:■Make sure HotSync Manager is running. If it is running, close it, and restart it. ■Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions380■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box. It should be set to the port where you connected the HotSync cradle.■If you are using the serial cradle, try a lower baud rate setting on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you aren’t running a program, such as America Online, that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.On a Mac computer, try the following:■Make sure that HotSync Manager is enabled on the HotSync Controls tab in the HotSync Software Setup window.I tried to perform a modem HotSync operation, but it did not complete successfully.Check the following on your computer:■Make sure your computer is turned on and that it does not shut down automatically as part of an energy-saving feature.■Make sure the modem connected to your computer is turned on and is connected to the outgoing phone line. ■Make sure the modem you are using with your handheld has an on-off switch. Your handheld cannot “wake up” a modem that has an auto-off feature.■Make sure the modem is connected properly to your computer and is connected to the incoming phone line.On a Windows computer, check the following:■Make sure that Modem is checked in the HotSync Manager menu.■Confirm that the Setup String in the Setup dialog box configures your modem correctly. You may need to select a different Modem Type or enter a custom Setup String. Most modems have a Setup String that causes them to send initial connection sounds to a speaker. You can use these sounds to check the modem connection.■Confirm that the Speed setting in the Setup dialog box works for your modem. If you have problems using the As Fast As Possible option or a specific speed, try using a slower speed.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
HotSync problems381■Make sure you are not running another program, such as WinFax, CompuServe, or America Online, that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.■Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)On a Mac computer, check the following:■Make sure that Modem is selected on the Connection Settings tab in the HotSync Software Setup window.■You may need to select a different Modem type or enter a Custom setup string on the Connection Settings tab. Most modems have a setup string that causes them to send initial connection sounds to a speaker. You can turn on the Modem Speaker option and use these sounds to check the modem connection.I tried to perform a modem HotSync operation, but it did not complete successfully. (continued)■Make sure you are not running another program, such as America Online, fax or telephony software, or AppleTalk networking, that uses the serial port you selected in the Serial Port Settings tab.■Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)Check the following on your handheld:■Confirm that the telephone cable is securely attached to your modem.■Make sure the dialing instruction dials the correct phone number. ■If you need to dial an outside line prefix, make sure you selected the Dial Prefix option on your handheld and entered the correct code.■If the telephone line you are using has Call Waiting, make sure you selected the Disable call waiting option under Modem Sync Phone Setup on your handheld and entered the correct code.■Make sure the telephone line you are using is not noisy, which can interrupt communications.■Check the batteries in your modem and replace them if necessary.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions382I can’t perform an IR HotSync operation. ■On a Windows computer, be sure the HotSync Manager is running and the Serial Port for local operations is set to the simulated port for infrared communication. See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.■On a Mac, open the HotSync Software Setup window and be sure that HotSync Manager is enabled and that the IR Port Connection Setting is set to On. See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for more information.■On your handheld, be sure the HotSync application is set to Local, with the option IR to PC/Handheld.■Be sure the IR port of your handheld is aligned directly opposite to, and within a few inches of, the infrared device of your computer.■IR HotSync operations do not work after you receive a low battery warning. Check the battery power of your handheld. Recharge the internal battery.When I press the HotSync button on the cradle, nothing happens on Palm Desktop software and my handheld times out.■Make a copy of your Palm folder. Uninstall, and then reinstall, Palm Desktop software.■Turn on your handheld and press the Home . Tap the HotSync icon, and then tap Local.When I perform a HotSync operation, my information does not transfer to Palm Desktop software.■If you perform a HotSync operation for more than one device, make sure the correct user is active on the Palm Desktop software.■If you have performed a HotSync operation successfully but you cannot find the data from your handheld on Palm Desktop software, check to see that you have the correct user name selected for viewing data.■On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Check that all conduits are set to synchronize files.■On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and check that the correct conduit is active. DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming problems383Beaming problemsMy handheld displays the message “Waiting for sender” when it’s near my computer’s infrared port.■Your computer’s infrared port may be set to search automatically for the presence of other infrared devices. Consult the documentation for your operating system for information about turning off this option.■In some cases, simply moving your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port solves the problem.I want to synchronize my computer with more than one handheld.■If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one handheld, each handheld must have a unique name. Assign a username to your handheld the first time you perform a HotSync operation.■Please be aware that synchronizing more than one handheld with the same username causes unpredictable results and, potentially, loss of your personal information.Problem SolutionI cannot beam data to another device with an IR port. ■If you are beaming to another Palm handheld, confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are between ten centimeters (approximately 4") and one meter (approximately 39") apart, and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles. Beaming distance to other devices with an IR port may be different.■Move your handheld closer to the receiving device.When someone beams data to my handheld, I get a message telling me it is out of memory.■Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the data you are receiving. For example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must have at least 60KB free.■Perform a soft reset. See “Performing a soft reset” in Appendix A for more information.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions384Recharging problemsSecurity and VPN problemsQuery: Need more security and VPN problems and solutions.Problem SolutionWhen I place my handheld in the cradle, the indicator light does not go on.■Confirm that your handheld is well seated in the cradle.■Confirm that your recharger cable is properly connected to the back of the cradle’s USB or serial port connector that plugs into your computer.■Confirm that your recharger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power.■If you have not used your handheld for a long period, such as an extended vacation, the battery may not contain enough charge to power the indicator light. After your handheld has recharged, the indicator light will function normally.Problem SolutionI forgot the password, and my handheld is not locked. First, use the password hint to try and remember the password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a password hint, you can use Security to delete the password, but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private. However, if you perform a HotSync operation before you delete the password, the HotSync process backs up all entries, whether or not they are marked private. Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entries:■Use the Palm Desktop software and the cradle or infrared communication to synchronize your data.■Tap Forgotten Password in Security to remove the password and delete all private records.■Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize your data and restore the private records by transferring them from your computer to your handheld.I forgot the password and my handheld is locked. First, use the password hint to try and remember the password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld. See “Performing a hard reset” in Appendix A for more information.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi problems385Wi-Fi problemsQuery: Need 802.11b radio and Wi-Fi problems and solutions.Technical supportIf, after reviewing the sources listed at the beginning of this appendix, you cannot solve your problem, contact your regional technical support office by e-mail, phone, or fax. Before requesting support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem. When you do contact support, please be ready to provide the following information:■The name and version of the operating system you are using■The actual error message or state you are experiencing■The steps you take to reproduce the problem■The version of handheld software you are using and available memory■The wireless service provider’s name■The software version of your 802.11b radioTo find your handheld version and memory information:1. Press the Home .2. Press Command Stroke + L.Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Info on the App Menu.NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for Palm OS handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large number of third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a third-party application, please contact the developer or publisher of that software.3. Tap Version to see version numbers, and tap Size to see the amount of free memory in kilobytes.To find your wireless service provider’s name and 802.11b radio software version:1. Press the Home . 2. Tap the Preferences icon . Problem Solution■DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions3863. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.4. Select Mobile.5. Select Current status.6. Scroll down to SV number to view the software version of your 802.11b radio.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
387Product Regulatory and Safety InformationFCC StatementThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:■Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.■Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.■Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.■Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.CAUTION Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards.Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy (SAR)In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users MUST use a Palm brand body-worn accessory during body-worn operation. Use of accessories not provided by Palm or that have not been tested for RF exposure compliance with this product may not comply with the FCC RF exposure safety guidelines and should not be used. FCC StatementTo comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The user of this device should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information388Industry CanadaThe term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.Canadian Wireless Regulatory NoticeThis Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian-Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause any interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors, and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.Battery WarningDo not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals.Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.Advarsel! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren.Varoitus Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.Waarschuwing! Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA.Palm™ Tungsten™ C Product FamilyTested to Comply With FCC StandardsFOR HOME OR OFFICE USEResponsible Party:Palm, Inc. 400 N. McCarthy Blvd.Milpitas, California 95052United States of America(408) 503-7500DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information389UwagaIntrinsic Safety WarningWarning - Explosion HazardSubstitution of component may impair suitability for Class I, division 2.Warning - Explosion HazardWhen in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules.Warning - Explosion HazardDo not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.Wireless Notices - Usage CautionsIn some situation, the use of the wireless device may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply abroad airplanes, in hospitals, near explosive environments, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are not certain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization first prior to turning on the device.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information390Declaration of ConformityEnglishHereby, Palm Solutions Group, declares that this 802.11B PDA is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.FinnishPalm Solutions Group vakuuttaa täten että 802.11B PDA tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EYoleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.DutchHierbij verklaart Palm Solutions Group dat het toestel 802.11B PDA in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.European Union NoticeCE Declaration of ConformityApplication of Council Directive(s):89/336/EEC (EMC directive), 99/5/EC (R&TTE directive), 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)Standards to which Conformity is Declared:EN55022EN301-489-1/-17 EN300-328EN55024EN60950EN50360/50361Digital Device Emissions (Class B)Radio Device EMC Radio Equipment EmissionsDigital Device EMCProduct SafetySAR SafetyManufacturers Name: Palm Solutions GroupManufacturers Location: 400 North McCarthy Blvd.Milpitas, CA 95035-5112USAImporters Name: Palm Germany GmbHImporters Location: Landsberger Strasse 155D-80687 MunchenGermanyType of Equipment Handheld ComputerModel Number: Tungsten CYear of Manufacture: 2002I, the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s)Place: Santa Clara, CA David WooDate: 10-28-02 Global Compliance ManagerDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information391Bij deze verklaart Palm Solutions Group dat deze 802.11B PDA voldoet aan de essentiële eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.FrenchPar la présente Palm Solutions Group déclare que l'appareil 802.11B PDA est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.Par la présente, Palm Solutions Group déclare que ce 802.11B PDA est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables.SwedishHärmed intygar Palm Solutions Group att denna 802.11B PDA står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevantabestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.DanishUndertegnede Palm Solutions Group erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr 802.11B PDA overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.GermanHiermit erklärt Palm Solutions Group, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses 802.11B PDA in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi)Hiermit erklärt Palm Solutions Group die Übereinstimmung des Gerätes 802.11B PDA mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderenrelevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien)GreekNeed text.ItalianCon la presente Palm Solutions Group dichiara che questo 802.11B PDA è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.SpanishPor medio de la presente Palm Solutions Group declara que el 802.11B PDA cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.PortuguesePalm Solutions Group declara que este 802.11B PDA está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information392DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
393IndexAABA (Address Book archive file) 32Accented characters, Graffiti writing 27Account. See E-mail accountAction icons 264Adding a bookmark 270Add-on applications 63–70Address Book*If Found Call* entry 75adding custom fields 78adding e-mail address from 192adding entry from e-mail 220archive files (.aba) 32business card for beaming 30categorizing records 51conduit for synchronizing 295creating records 47deleting records 49displaying category 78displaying data in the Address list 76finding records 14, 55fonts 61menus 77notes for records 60opening 73overview 73private records 352sorting records 59using to address e-mail 192Addressing e-maildisplaying another address 150, 156, 164, 246message 191–194using Smart Addressing 193Advanced preferences 216Agenda (Date Book view) 98AlarmLED setting 322lists 62preset 101setting in Clock 291setting in Date Book 92setting in Note Pad 118sound 101, 292, 322, 376vibrate setting 322Alarm sound 174Alerting for new mail 172AlphabetGraffiti writing 24APOPadding to an account 245, 248, 249and synchronization 225requirement 144, 244Application buttons 9, 37, 74, 87, 317ApplicationsAddress Book 73beaming 29–31Calculator 79Card Info 83categories 39–40Clock 285copying text to other 275Date Book 87downloading 268Expense 103font style 61installing 63–69Launcher 37–41Memo Pad 111Note Pad 115opening 37Palm Photos 121plug-in 281, 335preferences for 46removing 69security 340supporting Palm Web Browser 282To Do List 135viewing as icons 40viewing as list 40See also Add-on applicationsDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index394Applications Launcher 281, 282Archive filesimporting data from 32for main applications 32saving deleted records 49saving purged records 50Attaching a signature to messages 151, 157, 164Attachmentsdownloading 219icon for 180selecting plug-ins 233sending 194using Documents To Go 232–233Autofill, enabling or disabling 278Automatic fill, in Expense 110Auto-off delay 339Autotext 15Autotext. See Graffiti ShortCutsBBacking up e-mail databases 254Backlight 8adjusting 12Bannerold content 264, 269, 281saved page 274Batteryconserving power 339doesn’t charge 375gauge 37life and use 368recycling 368warning 388–390Bcc field 191 See also Blind copiesBeaminglocation of IR port 8problems with 383See also InfraredBeep for new mail 171Blind copies 150, 151, 156, 157, 164, 191, 246Blinking asterisk 171Bold font for text 61Bookmarksadding 270deleting 272editing 271visiting pages 271Brightnessadjusting 12key location 15Broken envelope icon 172Browsing the web 266–270Business card for beaming 30button. See iconButtonsmapping 317preferences 317CCalculatorbuttons explained 79–80memory 80overview 79recent calculations 79, 80Calibration 13, 320Call waitingdisabling 328Call Waiting, disabling 328Calling card, using in phone settings 329Capital letters (Graffiti writing) 25Capitalizing, CAPS key location 16CAPS keyfunction 16location 16Card Info 83Caring for the handheld 367Categoriesapplication 39–40assigning records to 50–52beaming 29–30creating 53default 39, 51displaying 52, 78, 377merging 54renaming 53using in Applications Launcher 39, 40Categoryfor bookmarks 270, 271for saved pages 274Cc field 191Certicom. See encryptionChain calculations 80Changingbookmark information 271DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index395History list size 279home page 277image download preferences 278saved page information 274text size 277Characters, Graffiti 21Check boxes 20Clearing Calculator entries 79Clearing reminders 172Clearing the History list 276Combining categories 54Comma delimited files, importing data from 32Commandbuttons 20toolbar 45Command bar in VersaMail 251Command stroke key 44, 45, 46Compressing Day view 100Compression 263, 278Conduitsfor synchronizing applications 379, 295–296, 370, 371for synchronizing applications, Macintosh 296–297Configuring Palm Web Browser 283Conflicting events 99Connectingservice templates 330to server or ISP 330ConnectionIR to PC 318modifying preferences 281selecting for network 327speed, effect on browsing 263Connection typeschanging in account 241GPRS, prerequisite for 144GSM, prerequisite for 144modem sled, prerequisite for 144network connection 143Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite for 144synchronize-only connection 143Contentlatest 269old 269, 281Continuous eventsdeleting from Date Book 50scheduling 93Contrast control 12Contrast. See BrightnessControlling Internet access 281Cookies, enabling or disabling 279Copyingnotes into other applications 115photos into other applications 121text 48Copying text 275Cradleconnecting to computer 10for local HotSync operations 302, 308viewing data from 339CreatingAddress Book entries 74–75categories 39–40, 53currency symbols 107custom fields in Address Book 78Date Book events 88Expense items 104expense reports 109notes for records 60records 47Currencydefault 107defining 107for Expense items 106Current date 377Current time 37Customcurrencies and symbols 107fields in Address Book 78Customizing Palm Web Browser 277–281Cutting text 48Cycling through views 74, 87DData entry. See Entering dataDatabase, upgrading a MultiMail database 142Databases, backing up 254Datedisplaying in Clock 292Expense item 105setting 319setting current 286, 377setting preference 319DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index396To Do List record due 138–139Date Bookadding Address Book data to records 57Agenda view 98alarm 92appointments, viewing reminders 171archive files (.dba) 32changing event time 91changing event to untimed 91conduit for synchronizing 295conflicting events 99continuous events 93–96creating records 47, 88–91Day view 96deleting records 49display options 100end time for Day view 101fonts 61menus 99Month view 97notes for records 60opening 87, 266overview 87private records 352purging records 50repeating events 50, 93–96scheduling events 88–89, 268–270selecting dates 90start time for Day view 101Sunday or Monday to start week 321switching views 96untimed events 88, 90Week view 96, 321, 378Day (Date Book view) 88, 100Day, displaying in Clock 292DBA (Date Book archive file) 32Decimal point 321Default 264categories 39, 51currency in Expense 107Default settingfor autofill 278for connection preferences 281for cookies 279for image download 278Default sizeof History list 276of text 277Delete key 16Deleted data, saving in archive files 49Deletingapplications 69bookmarks 272Desktop software 70e-mail 212–215, 246filters 240Graffiti characters 23History list 276mail in the trash 215old messages 214passwords 341plug-ins 282records 49saved pages 275service templates 336text 48See also Purging recordsDesktop softwaredisplaying euro 109linking to external files 33, 309removing 70, 71saving deleted data to an archive file 49Digitizer 13, 320Disablingautofill 278cookies 278Disconnecting a modem 159DNS (Domain Naming System) 332Documents To Goconverting attachments 232–233Double-booked events 99Download message size 149, 155, 163, 226Downloadingfiles, all types 268plug-ins 282stopping 269Downloading attachments 180Draftscreating 188saving 194, 197Draggingmemos into other applications 111using the stylus 14EEditingbookmarks 271DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index397saved pages 274Editing records 47E-mail 264accessing corporate e-mail 256adding Address Book entry from e-mail 220adding attachments 208–210addresses in Address Book 75addressing 191alert for new mail 172attaching files 169attachments 202–212backing up databases 254beeping for new mail 171buzzing or blinking for new mail 173composing 194copying and pasting text 251creating new messages 190–194days to synchronize 227deleting messages on handheld 212–215deleting messages on server 246downloading large attachments 206–208drafts 197emptying trash 215–216filters for 236–237folder on server 246forwarding 198, 199forwarding attachments 212getting entire message 169getting on desktop 222–226getting subject only 169header details 253icons 180, 197leaving mail on server 148, 155, 162, 244managing mail settings 240marking read and unread 217–218maximum message size 149, 155, 163, 226notification filter 174notification options 172personal signature 197, 219preferences 218–219reading 168replying to 199–201sending 194signature, adding 151, 157, 164storing in Outbox 194trash 215viewing attachments 202–205E-mail accountAPOP setting 245before setting up 143changing e-mail address 243changing mail server settings 244changing protocol type 241changing username and password 241checking for new messages 168, 169creating a synchronize-only account 152–158creating new 146–149, 155–156default mail service 166–168, 242deleting accounts 165–166displaying Inbox 168editing 164, 165editing accounts 159–248incoming and outgoing server 147, 154, 161managing mail settings 240notification filter 174notification option 171outgoing mail server 246password 147, 153, 161synchronization options 222–226synchronizing 222, 234–235username 147, 153, 161Emptying the History list 276Enablingautofill 278cookies 278Encryption 264Entering dataimporting from other applications 32–35problems with 377using the computer keyboard 32using the onscreen keyboard 17Entries. See Address BookEnvelope icon 180Error log 222ESMTP 144, 247adding to an account 249Eudora, configuring for e-mail 231Eurodisplaying on desktop computer 109in Expense 106, 107in Graffiti writing 27in onscreen keyboard 17printing 109Events. See Date BookDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index398Exclamation marks in To Do List 139Expansion Cardadding hardware 10applications 38copying applications 41described 11formatting 84renaming 84using cards 83Expenseadding Address Book data to records 57–58categorizing records 51creating records 104currency 106date of item 105defining new currency 107menus 109overview 103receipt details 105reports 109type 105, 110vendor 106Extended MAPI 224FFCC Statement 387Filesconverting attachments 232–233error log 222Files, linking to external 33, 309Filterscreating 236–238deleting 240editing 240examples of 239notification for Palm.com account 174turning on and off 238–239Find key 16FindingFind key location 16information in applications 54–58Palm Web Browser version 282phone numbers 57plug-ins 281using the Find application 56visited pages 275–276Folderscreating new 188viewing other 182Font size. See text sizeFonts 61, 109Formats preferences 320Forwarding 198Forwarding e-mail 198Frequently asked questions (FAQs)application problems 377beaming problems 383HotSync problems 378operating problems 375recharging problems 384software installation problems 374tapping and writing problems 376Frozen handheld 376Function keylocation 16using 18GGames 322General preferences 173, 315alarm LED setting 322alarm sounds 322alarm vibrate setting 322auto-off delay 339system sounds 322Getting e-mailchecking for new messages 169Glossary. See Graffiti ShortCutsGPRSprerequisite for connection 144Graffitiaccented characters 27alphabet 21, 24basic concepts 22capital letters 25moving the cursor 28numbers 25problems using 377punctuation marks 26ShortCuts for entering data 28symbols 27tips 23Graphics pick list 278graphics. See imagesGSMDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index399prerequisite for connection 144HHandheldalarm 174alerts for e-mail 174blinking 173buzzing 173VersaMail button 172vibrating 174Handheld, increasing space on 11Hard reset 369, 375Hardware add-ons 10Header field 175Help 265Help, online tips 21Helper applications. See plug-insHiding records 345History listchanging size of 279clearing 276definition 267, 275displaying old content 281limitations on size 280Home pagechanging 277returning to 268HotSyncconduits for synchronizing applications 295–296, 370, 371conduits for synchronizing applications, Mac 296customizing 296first-time operation 301–305, 310–313IR operation 306–309linking to external files 33, 309local operation 294, 302, 379local operation on Mac 304modem operation 294, 380–381network operation 297–301operations using cradle 308, 317operations using IR port 306–308, 318–319problems launching application 379problems with 378–383problems with IR 382restoring data 370–371setting options 293–294starting Manager 221synchronize active accounts 222synchronizing e-mail 235using with another PIM 70hyperlink. See linkIIconalarm 92application 40Back 267Forward 268Home 268note 60online Tips 21Open URL 266plug-in application 281Refresh 269repeating event 94Security 264Stop 269Tips 265Web Content 271Iconsbroken envelope 172for e-mail messages 180, 197HotSync Manager 221paperclip 180VersaMail e-mail 180Idle timeout of ISP or server connection 331Imagesbehavior in Palm Web Browser 263changing download preferences 278copying 275IMAPadding an account 146, 153, 160ESMTP synchronization in 225root mailbox 246server options 148, 155, 162synchronize an account 225wireless folder sychronization 255Importing data 32–35InboxReminders list and 172synchronizing 227viewing mail 168–169Incoming mail server 147, 153, 154, 161changing 244DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index400Indicator lightproblems 376setting 322Infraredconnections 318HotSync operations 306–308, 318–319PC connection 318port 8, 306problems with IR HotSync operations 382requirements for computer 306Initialization string 318Installingapplications 63–69conduit to install applications 295plug-ins 281International characterskeyboard 16typing 16International characters, Graffiti writing 27Internetpassword 326selecting connection 327username 326Internet access 281IP address 330, 332IR port.See also Beaming and InfraredIR. See InfraredIrCOMM 306, 318IrDA (Infrared Data Association) 306ISPlogin script 144requirements for 143requiring APOP 245, 248, 249requiring ESMTP 249Items. See To Do List or ExpenseJJumping to another web page 267KKeyboardcomputer 32description 15key clicking 323key repeat rate 323keyboard type 15onscreen 17press-and-hold 323remapping keys 323setting preferences 322Keyboard shortcuts in VersaMail 260LLauncher.See Applications LauncherLaunchingPalm Web Browser 266LED alarm 322Lettersfont style 61Graffiti 21, 24onscreen keyboard 17Link 267, 268, 281List, in Applications Launcher 40Locationsetting primary 286, 287setting secondary 288Locking the handheld with a password 338, 341–344Logging informational errors 222Login script 144, 333–336Looking up Address Book datato add to other records 57scrolling in Address list 54Losthandheld, contact for 75records 377Lotus Notes, selecting as mail client 224Lotus Organizer, importing data from 32MMac computer, system requirements 4Mail server settings, changing 244Mail service, default service for e-mail account 166–168, 242Mail settingschanging e-mail address 243changing mail server settings 244changing protocol type 241changing username and password 241managing 240Mailbox, adding new 146Maintenance information 367Marking messages unread/read 217Maximum message sizeDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index401for HotSync operation 226incoming e-mail 149, 155, 163POP and IMAP server 244Memo Padadding Address Book data to records 57archive files (.mpa) 32conduit for synchronizing 295creating records 47deleting records 49, 95dragging memos into other applications 111fonts 61menus 81, 113opening 111private records 352reviewing memos 112sorting records 59, 377Memoryfor beaming 383Calculator 80copying text to 275freeing 276handling content in 263limitations on History list 267, 279regaining 50, 375Memos. See Memo PadMenu bar 265, 267Menu commands 44, 45accessing 19key location 16using 45Menus 43–44, 45Address Book 77choosing 44command equivalents (Graffiti writing) 44, 45command toolbar 45commands 45Date Book 99, 291Edit menu 48Expense 109key location 16Memo Pad 81, 113, 119menu bar 19, 43menu commands 19Network Preferences 336Palm Photos 133problems 376To Do List 140Web Browser 283Microsoft Exchange 5.0 224Microsoft Outlookconnecting to 379synchronizing with 224Microsoft Outlook Expressconfiguring for e-mail 230selecting as mail client 224Modemauto-disconnect 159HotSync operations via 380–381initialization string 318initializing 159preferences 158timeout 159Modem sled, prerequisite for connection 144Modifyingconnection preferences 281History list size 279home page 277image download preferences 278text size 277Monday, to start week 321Month (Date Book view) 97, 100Moving the cursor (Graffiti writing) 28MPA (Memo Pad archive file) 32MultiMediaCard 7See also Expansion CardMultiple addressees 191NNavigator 14accessing international characters 17description 9in VersaMail 258location 8, 9look up Address Book record 55scroll 21scroll in Address Book 75Netscape 224Networkconnecting 330HotSync operation 297–301idle timeout 331login scripts 333–336password 326phone settings 327DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index402primary DNS 332secondary DNS 332selecting connection 327selecting service 325user name 326Network connection 143connection methods 143GPRS, prerequisite for 144GSM, prerequisite for 144modem sled, prerequisite for 144Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite for 144Note Padalarm 118copying notes into other applications 115menus 119opening 115overview 115reviewing notes 116Notes, attaching to records 60Notification filters 174Notification optionchanging the sound 173filter for Palm.com account 174Palm.com account 172–173Numbersdecimal point and thousands separator 321Graffiti writing 25onscreen keyboard 17OOld content 269, 281Old messages, deleting 212Onscreen keyboard 17, 49OpeningAddress Book 73applications 37bookmarked pages 271Calculator 79Clock 285Date Book 87, 266Memo Pad 111Note Pad 115Palm Photos 121Palm Web Browser 266saved pages 274To Do List 135Organizer (Lotus PIM) 32Outbox 188storing e-mail 194synchronizing 227Outgoing server, settings 147, 154, 161, 246Outlook, connecting to 379Overlapping events 99Overview of Palm Web Browser 263–265Owner preferences 338PPages. See web pagesPalm Desktop Linke-mail notification 173Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite for connection 144Palm OS database 268, 282Palm OS upgrade 3Palm Photoscopying photos into other applications 121menus 133opening 121Palm.com accounte-mail alert 173e-mail forwarding 172notification filter 174notification option 171, 172notification sound 173Paperclip icon 180Password 147, 153, 161changing 241, 341deleting 341editing in account 159for network 326forgotten 344, 384Pastingnotes into other applications 115photos into other applications 121Pasting text 49Payment, Expense item 106PDB. See Palm OS databasePeripheral hardware 10PhoneLookup 57settings for ISP or dial-in server 328Phone numbersDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index403selecting for Address list 76selecting types 75Pick lists 20pictures. See imagesPIM (personal information manager), using HotSync Manager with 70Plug-ins 233, 281, 282, 335POP accounts, APOP synchronization in 225POP3 accounts 148, 155, 162adding an account 146, 153, 160Port number 245, 247PortsIR on handheld 306serial 4, 5USB 4, 5Power button 8PPP 330PRC (application file extension) 335PRC. See ApplicationsPreferencesAdvanced 216Buttons 317choosing 46Connection 317–319cradle setting 339Date and Time 319–320deleting e-mail 218Digitizer 320Formats 320General 315, 321, 339getting mail 218Keyboard 322–324mail databases 254modem 158Network 325–336Owner 338Security 340–352ShortCuts 355Trash 216viewing 316Primary DNS 332Prioritizing To Do List records 136, 140Private recordsdisplaying and creating 345–352, 377lost with forgotten password 344Profile 226Profile, Mobile user 309Protocol, changing type 241Punctuation marksGraffiti writing 26Purgingrecords 50See also DeletingPush e-mail 172RRange of times in Day view 101Read messages, marking 217Reading e-mail 168–180Receipts, recording in Expense 105Recharging the battery 339Recordsbeaming 29–30choosing categories 50creating 47Date Book 88defined 47deleting 49, 95displaying a category of 52editing 47Expense 104fonts 61hiding private 340, 345lost 377masking private 340Memo Pad 111notes for 60private 345–352purging 50sorting 58–59To Do List 136unmasking individual 352Refreshing a page 269Reminder lists 62Reminders listtypes of reminders 171using 172viewing 171Removingapplications 69bookmarks 272Desktop software 70plug-ins 282saved pages 275Renamingbookmarks 271saved pages 274DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index404Renaming categories 53Repeating eventsdeleting from Date Book 50scheduling 93Replying to e-mail 199Rescheduling events 91Resetting handheldhard reset 369, 375location of reset button 10, 368soft reset 368Restoring dataMac 371Windows 370Returningto a page in History list 276to a web page 267to your home page 268RunningPalm Web Browser 266SSaved pagesdefinition 272deleting 275opening 274renaming 274viewing information about 270Savingdata 38, 47, 49e-mail databases 254e-mail messages 214Saving pages 272Scheduling events 88–91Screenblank 375calibrating 13, 320caring for 367touching with your finger 9Scroll bar 21SD card 7SDIO card 7, 10Searching. See FindingSecondary DNS 332Security 264, 340–355changing password 341deleting password 341forgotten password 344private records 345–352setting a password hint 340unmasking individual records 352Selectingdate for event 90phone numbers in Address Book 75text 48, 49Sendinge-mail 194Serial port 4, 5, 294Serverdeleting messages on 216, 219sent mail folder 246Serviceselecting for network 325templates 330, 336Settings. See PreferencesShortCutsbacking up 295for entering data 19, 356key location 16managing 355–356menu commands 44, 45predefined 29preferences 355using 19, 28Signature 151, 157, 164attaching personal 197–198, 219SMAPI (Simple MAPI) 224Smart Addressingturning on 194using 193SMTP settings 246Soft reset 368Sortingapplications 39records 58–59, 377Soundalarm on handheld 174changing for mail notification 173Sounds. See Alarm and System soundsSpecial characters, typing 16Speed 264, 269, 278Spelling correction, automatic 15StartingPalm Web Browser 266Starting applications 37Stopping a download 269Stylusdragging with 14DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index405tapping with 13Sunday, to start week 321Symbol key 16Symbol, for currency 106Symbolsin Graffiti writing 27Synchronize-only account, creating 152–158Synchronize-only connection 143Synchronizing an existing username 142Synchronizing e-mail 234–235active accounts 235e-mail applications for 224HotSync operation 222logging errors 222setting how many days 227turn off synchronization 235Synchronizing IMAP folders 255Systemconduit 295sounds 322System requirements 3TTab delimited files, importing data from 32Tab key 15Tapping 13TCP/IP 325TDA (To Do List archive file) 32Technical support 373, 385Textcopying 48copying and pasting in e-mail 251cutting 48entry. See Entering datafiles, importing data from 32, 34fonts for 61selecting all 49Text size 277Thousands separator 321Timealarm setting 92format 321setting current 287, 319setting event 88setting preference 319start and end for Date Book Day view 101Time Zone 289setting 320Tips 265Tips, online 21Title bar 264, 269To 243To Do Listadding Address Book data to records 57archive files (.tda) 32categorizing records 50, 140checking off items 137completed items 139completion date 139conduit for synchronizing 295creating records 47deleting records 49, 95due date 138–139fonts 61menus 140notes for records 60opening 135overview 135prioritizing records 136, 140private records 352purging records 50, 139sorting records 59To Do List tasks, viewing reminders 171To field 191Today. See Current dateTrashautomatically emptying 216creating other folders 188emptying deleted e-mail 215–216setting frequency in preferences 216Troubleshooting 382Turning off handheldautomatically 339problems with 376Turning on handhelddisplaying owner’s name 338power button 8problems with 375UUndoing actions 48Uniform Resource Locator. See web addressUninstallingplug-ins 282Uninstalling Desktop software 70DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index406Universal connector 10, 317Unread mail 148, 155, 162, 244Unread messages, marking 217Unresponsive handheld 376Untimed events 88, 90, 91, 93Upgrading 3Upgrading a MultiMail database 142URL. See web addressUSBinfrared communication 308Local tab settings 294port 4, 5User profiles, HotSync operation with 312–313Username 147, 153, 161changing 241editing in account 159entering 241for ISP 326identifying handheld 338synchronizing existing 142VvCal 32vCard 32Vendor for Expense item 106VersaMailicons 180, 197setting preferences for 218VersaMail application 141–261Vibrate alarm 174, 322Viewingpage information 270plug-in content 281–282Visitingbookmarked pages 271web pages 266Voice jack 10WWeb addresschanging home page 277definition 263entering in Palm Web Browser 266Web Browsermenus 283Web Library 283Web pagedisplaying old content 269, 281list of visited 276refreshing 269saved 272Web Panel Preferences panel 283Week (Date Book view) 96–97, 321, 378Windows, system requirements 4Wireless connections 263, 281Wireless modem 159Wireless Preferences panel. See Web Panel Preferences panelWireless service providerpassword 326username 326World Clockalarm 291alarm preferences 292display options 292menus 291opening 285Time Zone 289Writing area 8Writing. See Entering dataDRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential

Navigation menu